ELECTRICAL SYSTEM GI

SECTION EL MA

EM

LC

EC

CONTENTS FE

PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................5 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................60

CL
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - .......................................60
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............5 FRONT FOG LAMP.......................................................62 MT
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ..............................5 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .........................................62
Precautions for Harness Repair ..................................5 Bulb Replacement .....................................................63
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................6 Aiming Adjustment .....................................................64 AT
HARNESS CONNECTOR................................................7 REAR FOG LAMP .........................................................65
Description ...................................................................7 Wiring Diagram - R/FOG -.........................................65
STANDARDIZED RELAY................................................9 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS .....67
AX
Description ...................................................................9 System Description/QG Engine Models and YD
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING.........................................11 Engine Models with Common Rail ............................67 SU
Schematic ..................................................................12 System Description/YD Engine Models with
Wiring Diagram - POWER - ......................................14 Common Rail and K9K Engine Models.....................69
Inspection...................................................................23 Schematic ..................................................................70 BR
GROUND........................................................................24 Wiring Diagram - TURN - ..........................................71
Ground Distribution....................................................24 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................74
COMBINATION SWITCH ..............................................39 ILLUMINATION..............................................................75 ST
Check.........................................................................39 Schematic ..................................................................75
Replacement..............................................................40 Wiring Diagram - ILL - ...............................................76
RS
STEERING SWITCH......................................................41 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP...............................................80
Check.........................................................................41 System Description/QG and YD Engine Models
HEADLAMP ...................................................................42 with Common Rail .....................................................80 BT
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -.......................................42 System Description/YD Engine Models without
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................43 Common Rail and K9K Engine Models.....................82
Bulb Replacement .....................................................44 Wiring Diagram - ROOM/L - ......................................84 HA
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................44 Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM - .................46 with Common Rail .....................................................86
System Description....................................................46 Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without
SC
Schematic ..................................................................47 Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................102
Wiring Diagram - DTRL -...........................................48 SPOT AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS ...........................108
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................51 Wiring Diagram - INT/L - .........................................108
Bulb Replacement .....................................................51 METERS AND GAUGES.............................................110
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................52 Component Parts and Harness Connector IDX
HEADLAMP - HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL -........53 Location ...................................................................110
Wiring Diagram - H/AIM - ..........................................53 System Description..................................................110
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS .....................55 Combination Meter ..................................................112
Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -..........................................55 Schematic ................................................................113
STOP LAMP ..................................................................58 Wiring Diagram - METER - .....................................114
Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - .......................................58 Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis ..........................117
 CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................120 AUDIO ..........................................................................192
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................128 System Description..................................................192
WARNING LAMPS ......................................................129 Component Parts Location ......................................194
Schematic ................................................................129 Schematic ................................................................195
Wiring Diagram - WARN - .......................................130 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -.......................................198
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................135 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................213
WARNING CHIME .......................................................136 Inspection.................................................................213
Component Parts and Harness Connector AUDIO ANTENNA .......................................................214
Location ...................................................................136 Location of Antenna.................................................214
System Description/QG Engine Models and YD Antenna Rod Replacement .....................................214
Engine Models with Common Rail ..........................136 VFD DISPLAY..............................................................215
System Description/YD Engine Models without System Description..................................................215
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................137 Component Parts and Harness Connector and
Wiring Diagram - CHIME - ......................................139 Harness Connector Location ...................................217
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models Wiring Diagram - COMM -.......................................218
with Common Rail ...................................................141 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit ....220
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Terminals and Reference Value for Multifunction
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................152 Switch ......................................................................221
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER ..................................158 Trouble Diagnosis ....................................................222
System Description..................................................158 LCD DISPLAY .............................................................238
Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ......................................160 System Description..................................................238
Removal and Installation .........................................162 Precautions for Display Unit Replacement..............242
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................163 Component Parts and Harness Connector and
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................163 Harness Connector Location ...................................242
REAR WIPER AND WASHER ....................................164 Wiring Diagram - COMM -.......................................243
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R -........................................164 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit ....245
Removal and Installation .........................................166 Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................166 Control Unit..............................................................245
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................167 Terminals and Reference Value for Multifunction
HEADLAMP WASHER ................................................168 Switch ......................................................................245
Wiring Diagram - HLC -...........................................168 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................245
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................169 TELEPHONE (PRE WIRE) ..........................................246
HORN ...........................................................................170 Wiring Diagram - PHONE - .....................................246
Wiring Diagram - HORN - .......................................170 HEATED SEAT ............................................................247
CIGARETTE LIGHTER................................................171 Wiring Diagram - H/SEAT - .....................................247
Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -.......................................171 POWER SUNROOF.....................................................249
CLOCK.........................................................................172 Wiring Diagram - SROOF - .....................................249
Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -......................................172 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................250
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER.....................................173 DOOR MIRROR ...........................................................251
System Description/QG and YD Engine Models Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ...................................251
with Common Rail ...................................................173 POWER WINDOW .......................................................253
System Description/YD Engine Models without System Description..................................................253
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................174 Schematic ................................................................255
Schematic ................................................................175 Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - ..................................256
Wiring Diagram - DEF -...........................................176 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................260
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models POWER DOOR LOCK.................................................261
with Common Rail ...................................................179 System Description..................................................261
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Schematic ................................................................262
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................186 Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -.....................................264
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................189 Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models
Filament Check........................................................190 with Common Rail ...................................................271
Filament Repair .......................................................191

EL-2
 CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Schematic ................................................................442 GI
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................292 Wiring Diagram - NAVI -..........................................443
POWER DOOR LOCK - SUPER LOCK -...................301 Wiring Diagram - COMM -.......................................448
System Description..................................................301 Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI MA
Schematic ................................................................304 Control Unit..............................................................450
Wiring Diagram - S/LOCK -.....................................306 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit ....454
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models Terminals and Reference Value for Multifunction
EM
with Common Rail ...................................................313 Switch ......................................................................456
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Self-Diagnosis Function...........................................457 LC
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................339 Self-Diagnosis Mode................................................458
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................352 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ...............................461
System Description..................................................352 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...............467 EC
Wiring Diagram - MULTI - .......................................353 Check Display Unit, Multifunction Switch Power,
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models and Ground Circuit ..................................................469
with Common Rail ...................................................355 Vehicle Speed Signal Check ...................................471 FE
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Illumination Control Signal Check ...........................472
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................360 Ignition Signal Check...............................................473 CL
ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................364 Reverse Signal Check .............................................474
Remote Controller Battery Replacement.................365 RGB Screen Is Not Shown......................................475
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM .......................................366 No Screens Appear .................................................477 MT
Wiring Diagram - PRWIRE -....................................366 Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper .........................477
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM.................368 RGB Screen Is Rolling ............................................482
Description ...............................................................368 Guide Sound Is Not Heard ......................................484 AT
CONSULT-II .............................................................369 Multifunction Switch Controls Are Ineffective
Schematic ................................................................374 (Rear Defogger Control Excluded) ..........................485
AX
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table ........376 Air Conditioning Controls (Only) Are Ineffective
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................378 (Rear Defogger Control Excluded) ..........................489
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ...............379 Rear Defogger Does Not Operate...........................491 SU
CAN Communication Line Check............................380 Rear Defogger Indicator Lamp Does Not
TIME CONTROL UNIT ................................................381 Illuminate..................................................................492
Description ...............................................................381 No Fuel Information Is Displayed/No Warning BR
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................382 Message Is Displayed .............................................493
Schematic ................................................................384 Previous Conditions Are Not Stored........................495
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM).....................386 The Position of The Current-Location Mark Is
ST
Component Parts and Harness Connetor Not Correct ..............................................................495
Location ...................................................................386 Radio Wave From The GPS Satellite Is Not RS
System Description..................................................386 Received ..................................................................495
System Composition................................................387 Display Does Not Change When Screen
Wiring Diagram - NATS -.........................................388 Adjustment Is Performed .........................................496 BT
CONSULT-II .............................................................390 Day/Night Display Switching Is Not Done. Night
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models Illumination for AV and NAVI Control Unit Does
with Common Rail ...................................................393 Not Illuminate...........................................................496 HA
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp......................411 On Multifunction Switch, a Specific Switch Does
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Not Operate in All Conditions ..................................496
SC
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models...................412 Driving Information Is Inaccurate. Maintenance
How to Replace NATS IMMU..................................429 Information Is Inaccurate .........................................496
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...............................................430 System Does Not Start............................................497
System Description..................................................430 The Current Position Mark Is in the Wrong Place ..497
Precautions for AV and NAVI Control Unit The Current-Location Mark Will Not Move
Replacement............................................................440 Forward/Backward ...................................................498 IDX
Component Parts Location ......................................441 The Position of the Current-Location Mark Is Not
Location of Antenna.................................................441 Correct .....................................................................498

EL-3
 CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Driving Test ..............................................................499 Passenger Compartment/LHD Models....................546
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal ........500 Passenger Compartment/RHD Models ...................548
Program Loading .....................................................508 HARNESS LAYOUT ....................................................550
CAN COMMUNICATION .............................................509 How to Read Harness Layout .................................550
System Description..................................................509 Outline/Sedan ..........................................................551
CAN Communication Unit........................................509 Outline/Hatchback....................................................553
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)..............................................512 Main Harness...........................................................556
Component Parts and Harness Connector Engine Room Harness ............................................560
Location ...................................................................512 Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models...........566
System Description..................................................512 Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models ...........570
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................513 Body Harness/Sedan...............................................578
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................515 Body Harness/Hatchback ........................................586
Component Inspection.............................................529 Room Lamp Harness...............................................590
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)..............................................530 Front Door Harness/LHD Models ............................591
Component Parts and Harness Connector Front Door Harness/RHD Models ...........................593
Location ...................................................................530 Rear Door Harness..................................................595
System Description..................................................530 Back Door Harness .................................................597
Wiring Diagram - CAN - ..........................................531 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................598
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................533 Headlamp.................................................................598
Component Inspection.............................................542 Exterior Lamp ..........................................................598
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................543 Interior Lamp............................................................598
Engine Compartment...............................................543 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES).............599

EL-4
 PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
NJEL0001
GI
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows (The compo- MA
sition varies according to the destination and optional equipment.):
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer- EM
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat
belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision LC
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), side air bag (satellite) sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal
collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision). EC
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING: FE
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer. CL
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section. MT
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tor. AT

AX

SU

BR

Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis NJEL0635 ST

CAN SYSTEM NJEL0635S01
I Do not apply voltage of 7.0V or higher to the measurement
terminals. RS
I Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0V or less.
BT

HA

Precautions for Harness Repair NJEL0636

SC
CAN SYSTEM NJEL0636S01
I Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted
line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in)]

IDX

PKIA0306E

EL-5
 PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Harness Repair (Cont’d)
I Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts.
(The spliced wire will become separated and the characteris-
tics of twisted line will be lost.)

PKIA0307E

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NJEL0002

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I Refer to GI-12, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I Refer to EL-12, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I Refer to GI-33, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I Refer to GI-22, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.

EL-6
 HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description

Description NJEL0003
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
I The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
NJEL0003S01
GI
I The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below. MA
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. EM
[Example]
LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

SEL769DA IDX

EL-7
 HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) =NJEL0003S02
I A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
I The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnec-
tion.
I The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustra-
tion below.
CAUTION:
I Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
I Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]

SEL769V

EL-8
 STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description

Description NJEL0004
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
NJEL0004S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT
SEL881H

TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS NJEL0004S02

AT
1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make

1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC
SEL882H

IDX

EL-9
 STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description (Cont’d)

GEL264

EL-10
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING

NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-11
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0418

YEL657D

EL-12
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL658D

EL-13
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER —

Wiring Diagram — POWER — NJEL0419

BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION NJEL0419S01

YEL659D

EL-14
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL660D

EL-15
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

YEL661D

EL-16
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL662D

EL-17
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

YEL663D

EL-18
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL664D

EL-19
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

YEL665D

EL-20
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SWITCH IN “ACC” OR “ON” NJEL0419S04

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL666D

EL-21
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START” NJEL0419S05

YEL667D

EL-22
 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Inspection

Inspection NJEL0007
FUSE
I If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem
NJEL0007S01
GI
before installing new fuse.
I Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than MA
specified rating.
I Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse
holder properly. EM
I Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is
not used for a long period of time.
CEL083 LC
FUSIBLE LINK NJEL0007S02
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or EC
by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: FE
I If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of CL
problem.
I Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Impor-
SEL165W tant: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, MT
vinyl or rubber parts.
AT

AX

SU

BR

CIRCUIT BREAKER NJEL0007S03

For example, when current is 30A, the circuit is broken within 8 to
ST
20 seconds.
RS

BT

HA
SBF284E

CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE) NJEL0007S04

SC
The PTC thermister generates heat in response to current flow.
The temperature (and resistance) of the thermister element varies
with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element’s
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified
level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit
current. IDX
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance
falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to
resume.
SEL109W

EL-23
 GROUND
Ground Distribution

Ground Distribution NJEL0008

MAIN HARNESS NJEL0008S01

YEL789D

EL-24
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL790D

EL-25
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

YEL791D

EL-26
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL792D

EL-27
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS NJEL0008S02

YEL793D

EL-28
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL794D

EL-29
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

YEL795D

EL-30
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/QG ENGINE MODELS NJEL0008S03

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL796D

EL-31
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL NJEL0008S12

YEL797D

EL-32
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/YD ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL NJEL0008S09

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL798D

EL-33
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS/SEDAN NJEL0008S04

YEL800D

EL-34
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL612C

EL-35
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS/HATCHBACK NJEL0008S10

YEL613C

EL-36
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BACK DOOR HARNESS NJEL0008S11

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL801D

EL-37
 GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ROOM LAMP AND REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS NJEL0008S08

YEL615C

EL-38
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check

Check NJEL0423

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL802D

EL-39
 COMBINATION SWITCH
Replacement

Replacement NJEL0010
For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to RS-29,
“Installation — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”.
I Each switch can be replaced without removing combination
switch base.

MKIA0054E

I To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching

screw.

CEL406

I Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel

guide pins with the screws which secure the combination
switch as shown in the left figure.

SEL151V

EL-40
STEERING SWITCH
Check

Check NJEL0350

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL803D

EL-41
 HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — NJEL0420

YEL668D

EL-42
 HEADLAMP
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0202

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Neither headlamp operates. 1. Lighting switch 1. Check Lighting switch.

LH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 35, located in fusible link and MA
does not operate, but RH head- 2. Headlamp LH ground circuit fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
lamp (low and high beam) does 3. Lighting switch at lighting switch terminal 8.
operate. 2. Check headlamp LH ground circuit. EM
3. Check lighting switch.

RH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 36, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but LH headlamp 2. Headlamp RH ground circuit fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present LC
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Lighting switch at lighting switch terminal 5.
2. Check headlamp RH ground circuit.
3. Check lighting switch. EC
LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but LH low beam does operate. 2. Open in LH high beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and LH
3. Lighting switch high beam for an open circuit.
FE
3. Check lighting switch.

LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. CL

LH high beam does operate. 2. Open in LH low beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and LH
3. Lighting switch low beam for an open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch. MT
RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but RH low beam does operate. 2. Open in RH high beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and RH
3. Lighting switch high beam for an open circuit. AT
3. Check lighting switch.

RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb. AX

but RH high beam does operate. 2. Open in RH low beam circuit 2. Check the harness between lighting switch and RH
3. Lighting switch low beam for an open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
SU
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Ground circuit 2. Check harness between high beam indicator and
3. Open in high beam circuit ground. BR
3. Check the harness between lighting switch and
combination meter for an open circuit.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-43
 HEADLAMP
Bulb Replacement

Bulb Replacement NJEL0015

The headlamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replace-
able halogen bulb. The bulb can be replaced from the engine com-
partment side without removing the headlamp body.
I Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope.
1. Disconnect the battery cable.
2. Pull off the rubber cap.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the
bulb.
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring.
5. Remove the headlamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or rotate
the bulb when removing it.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering headlamp body
may affect the performance of the headlamp. Remove head-
lamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just before a replace-
ment bulb is installed.

YEL809D

Aiming Adjustment NJEL0016

For details, refer to the regulations in your own country.
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures.
2) Place vehicle on flat surface.
3) See that there is no-load in vehicle (coolant, engine oil filled up
to correct level and full fuel tank) other than the driver (or
equivalent weight placed in driver’s position).

CAUTION:
Be sure aiming switch is set to “0” when performing aiming
adjustment on vehicles equipped with headlamp aiming con-
trol.

SEL984W

EL-44
 HEADLAMP
Aiming Adjustment (Cont’d)
LOW BEAM =NJEL0016S02
1. Turn headlamp low beam on.
2. Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment. GI
I First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then
make adjustment by loosening the screw.
MA

EM

YEL810D LC
I Adjust headlamps so that main axis of light is parallel to
center line of body and is aligned with point P shown in
illustration. EC
I Figure to the left shows headlamp aiming pattern for driv-
ing on right side of road; for driving on left side of road,
aiming pattern is reversed.
FE
I Dotted lines to point P in illustration show center of head-
lamp. CL
“H”: Horizontal center line of headlamps
“WL”: Distance between each headlamp center
“L”: 5,000 mm (196.85 in) MT
“C”: 65 mm (2.56 in)

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL254I

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-45
 HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description

System Description NJEL0351

The headlamp system on vehicles for cold spec. option contains a daytime light unit. The unit activates the
following whenever the engine is running with the lighting switch in the OFF position:
I Low beam headlamps
I Parking, license, tail and illumination lamps
Power is supplied at all times
I through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I to daytime light unit terminal 1 and
I to lighting switch terminal 11.
Power is also supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse (No. 36, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I to daytime light unit terminal 3 and
I to lighting switch terminal 5.
Power is also supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse (No. 35, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I to daytime light unit terminal 2 and
I to lighting switch terminal 8.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to daytime light unit terminal 7.
With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 21, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to daytime light unit terminal 6.
Ground is supplied to daytime light unit terminal 9 through body grounds E30 and E73.
HEADLAMP OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT CANCEL OPERATION) NJEL0351S01
When the lighting switch is turned to the 1st or 2nd position, power is supplied
I through lighting switch terminal 12,
I to daytime light unit terminal 11.
Then daytime light will be canceled. And the lighting system operation will be the same as no daytime light
system.
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION NJEL0351S02
With the engine running and the lighting switch in the OFF position, power is supplied
I from alternator terminal 3
I to daytime light unit terminal 8,
I through daytime light unit terminal 5
I to terminal 4 of headlamp LH,
I through daytime light unit terminal 4
I to terminal 2 of headlamp RH and
I through daytime light unit terminal 10
I to tail lamp and illumination.
Ground is supplied to terminal 5 of headlamp LH and terminal 1 of headlamp RH through body grounds E30
and E73.

EL-46
HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0421

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL669D

EL-47
 HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —

Wiring Diagram — DTRL — NJEL0422

YEL670D

EL-48
HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL671D

EL-49
 HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)

YEL672D

EL-50
 HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0354

DAYTIME LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION TABLE NJEL0354S01
GI
Voltage (V)
INPUT (I)/ OUT-
Terminal No. Connections Operated condition (Approximate val-
PUT (O)
ues) MA
Power source for illumina-
1 — — 12
tion & tail lamp
EM
Power source for headlamp
2 — — 12
LH
LC
Power source for headlamp
3 — — 12
RH

ON (daytime light operating*) 12 EC

4 Headlamp RH O
OFF 0

ON (daytime light operating*) 12 FE

5 Headlamp LH O
OFF 0

START 12
CL
6 Start signal I Ignition switch
ON, ACC or OFF 0
MT
ON or START 12
7 Power source — Ignition switch
ACC or OFF 0
AT
Running 12
8 Alternator “L” terminal I Engine
Stopped 0
AX
9 Ground — — —

ON (daytime light operating*) 12

10 Illumination & tail lamp O SU
OFF 0

1ST·2ND position 12
11 Lighting switch I
BR
OFF 0

*: Daytime light operating: Lighting switch in “OFF” position with engine running. ST

RS

BT

HA

Bulb Replacement NJEL0355

SC
Refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-44).

IDX

EL-51
 HEADLAMP — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Aiming Adjustment

Aiming Adjustment NJEL0356

Refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-44).

EL-52
HEADLAMP — HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL —
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —

Wiring Diagram — H/AIM — NJEL0424

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL673D

EL-53
 HEADLAMP — HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL —
Wiring Diagram — H/AIM — (Cont’d)

YEL674D

EL-54
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —

Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — NJEL0425

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL675D

EL-55
 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)

YEL676D

EL-56
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL677D

EL-57
 STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —

Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — NJEL0426

YEL678D

EL-58
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL679D

EL-59
 BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —

Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — NJEL0427

YEL680D

EL-60
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL681D

EL-61
 FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —

Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — NJEL0428

YEL682D

EL-62
 FRONT FOG LAMP
Bulb Replacement

Bulb Replacement NJEL0314

The front fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a
replaceable halogen bulb. GI
I Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope.
MA
1. Disconnect the battery cable.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the
bulb. EM
3. Pull off the bulb holder.
4. Remove the front fog lamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or
rotate the bulb when removing it. LC
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: EC
I Do not leave front fog lamp reflector without bulb for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering
front fog lamp body may affect the performance of the FE
front fog lamp. Remove front fog lamp bulb from the front
fog lamp reflector just before a replacement bulb is
installed. CL

YEL811D
MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-63
 FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment

Aiming Adjustment =NJEL0029

Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
2) Place vehicle on level ground.
3) See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver’s seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting
screw.
YEL812D

1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown at left.
2. Remove front fog lamp rim. For detail, refer to “BODY END” in
BT section.
3. Turn front fog lamps ON.

MEL327G

4. Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high inten-
sity zone is 152 mm (6.0 in) (Sedan) or 91 to 136 mm (3.58 to
5.35 in) (Hatchback) below the height of the fog lamp centers
as shown at left.
I When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the head-
lamps and opposite fog lamp.

NEL794

EL-64
REAR FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG —

Wiring Diagram — R/FOG — NJEL0429

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL683D

EL-65
 REAR FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — R/FOG — (Cont’d)

YEL684D

EL-66
 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description/QG Engine Models and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

System Description/QG Engine Models and YD

Engine Models with Common Rail NJEL0430
GI
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION NJEL0430S01
The turn signal lamps operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch
and smart entrance control unit. MA
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 56 EM
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] LC
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 29
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 53 through body grounds F118 (QG engine models),
M28 and M67. EC
LH Turn NJEL0430S0101
When the turn signal switch is moved to the L position, ground is supplied from body grounds E30 and E73 FE
to
I smart entrance control unit terminal 25
I through turn signal switch terminal 3
CL
With ground is supplied, smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
Power is supplied from smart entrance control unit terminal 64 MT
I to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1,
I to side turn signal lamp LH terminal 2,
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2 (for sedan models) or AT
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 (for hatchback models).
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2 through body grounds E30 and E73. AX
Ground is supplied to the side turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 through body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 1 through body grounds B9, B21 and B308 (for
sedan models). SU
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 4 through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (for
hatchback models).
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal BR
lamps, and smart entrance control unit sent flashing indicator signal (LH turn signal) to combination meter with
CAN communication line.
I to combination meter terminal 26 and 27 ST
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 8 and 11.
Turn signal LH is flushing of combination meter. RS
RH Turn NJEL0430S0102
When the turn signal switch is moved to the R position, ground is supplied from body grounds E30 and E73 BT
to
I smart entrance control unit terminal 26
I through turn signal switch terminal 2 HA
With ground is supplied, smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
Power is supplied from smart entrance control unit terminal 63
I to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1,
SC
I to side turn signal lamp RH terminal 2,
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2 (for sedan models) or
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 (for hatchback models).
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp RH terminal 2 through body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to the side turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 through body grounds E30 and E73. IDX
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 1 through body grounds B9, B21 and B21 (for
sedan models).
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 4 through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (for

EL-67
 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description/QG Engine Models and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
hatchback models).
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal
lamps, and smart entrance control unit sent RH turn signal to combination meter with CAN communication
line.
I to combination meter terminal 26 and 27
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 8 and 11.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION NJEL0430S02
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 56
With the hazard switch in the ON position, ground is supplied from body grounds F118 (QG engine models),
M28 and M67 to
I smart entrance control unit terminal 30
I through hazard switch terminals 1 and 3
With ground is supplied, smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps.
Power is supplied from smart entrance control unit terminal 64
I to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1,
I to side turn signal lamp LH terminal 2,
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2 (for sedan models) or
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5 (for hatchback models).
Power is supplied from smart entrance control unit terminal 63
I to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1,
I to side turn signal lamp RH terminal 2,
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2 (for sedan models) or
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5 (for hatchback models).
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 each side turn signal lamp through body grounds E30 and E73.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of rear combination lamp through body grounds B9 and B21 and B308 (for
sedan models).
Ground is supplied to terminal 4 of rear combination lamp through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (for hatch-
back models).
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps, and smart entrance control unit sent flashing indicator signal (hazard warning signal) to combination
meter with CAN communication line.
I to combination meter terminal 26 and 27
I from smart entrance control unit terminals 8 and 11.
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM NJEL0430S04
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller, smart entrance control unit controls turn
lamps hazard reminder flashes as follows.
I Locked operation: Flash once
I Unlock operation: Flash twice

EL-68
 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

System Description/YD Engine Models with

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0547
GI
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION NJEL0547S01
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)] MA
I to time control unit terminal 9
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
EM
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 1
Ground is supplied to time control unit terminal 16 through body grounds M28 and M67. LC
LH Turn NJEL0547S0101
When the turn signal switch is moved to the L position, ground is supplied from body grounds E30 and E73 EC
to
I time control unit terminal 2
I through turn signal switch terminal 3 FE
With ground is supplied, time control unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH Turn CL
NJEL0547S0102
When the turn signal switch is moved to the R position, ground is supplied from body grounds E30 and E73
to MT
I time control unit terminal 4
I through turn signal switch terminal 2
With ground is supplied, time control unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps. AT
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION NJEL0547S02
Power is supplied at all times AX
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 9
SU
Ground is supplied to time control unit terminal 16 through body grounds M28 and M67.
With the hazard switch in the ON position, ground is supplied from body grounds M28 and M67 to
I time control unit terminals 1 and 5 BR
I through hazard switch terminal 3
With ground is supplied, time control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning lamps.
ST
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION FOR MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM NJEL0547S03
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller, time control unit controls turn lamps haz-
ard reminder flashes as follows. RS
I Locked operation: Flash once
I Unlock operation: Flash twice BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-69
 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0534

YEL685D

EL-70
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN —

Wiring Diagram — TURN — NJEL0431

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL686D

EL-71
 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)

YEL687D

EL-72
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL688D

EL-73
 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0432

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Turn signal and hazard warning 1. Smart entrance control unit 1. Check power door lock operation.
lamps do not operate. 2. Smart entrance control unit cir- 2. Check power supply and ground circuit for time con-
cuit trol unit.

Turn signal lamps do not operate 1. Turn signal switch 1. Check turn signal switch.
but hazard warning lamps operate. 2. Open in turn signal switch cir- 2. Check turn signal switch ground for open circuit.
cuit

Hazard warning lamps do not 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch.

operate but turn signal lamps 2. Open in hazard switch circuit 2. Check hazard switch ground for open circuit.
operate.

Front turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

does not operate. 2. Open in front turn signal lamp 2. Check power supply and ground circuit for front turn
circuit signal lamp.

Side turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

does not operate. 2. Open in rear combination lamp 2. Check power supply and ground circuit for rear com-
circuit bination lamp.

Rear combination lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

does not operate. 2. Open in side turn signal lamp 2. Check grounds check power supply and ground circuit
circuit for rear combination lamp.

LH and RH turn indicators do not 1. Ground 1. Check grounds E30 and E73
operate. 2. CAN communication line 2. Perform self-diagnosis for smart entrance control unit
I If self-diagnosis result is OK, replace combination
meter
I If self-diagnosis result is NG, refer to EL-380, “CAN
Communication Line Check”.

LH or RH turn indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.

operate.

EL-74
ILLUMINATION
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0433

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL689D

EL-75
 ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —

Wiring Diagram — ILL — NJEL0434

YEL690D

EL-76
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL691D

EL-77
 ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

YEL692D

EL-78
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL693D

EL-79
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

System Description/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail =NJEL0435
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NJEL0435S01
Power is supplied at all times:
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 56
I to key switch terminal 1 and
I through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to interior room lamp terminal 1.
When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted:
I through key switch terminal 2
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 5.
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 29.
Ground is supplied:
I through body grounds terminals F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 53
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (Hatchback) or B308 (Sedan)
I to door switch driver side terminal 3
I from door switch driver side terminal 2
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 43.
When any door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through case ground of each door switch
I to each door switch terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 44.
When the driver side door is unlocked by the door lock/unlock switch, the smart entrance control unit receives
a ground signal:
I through body grounds M28, M67 and F118 (QG engine models)
I to door lock/unlock switch terminal 3
I from door lock/unlock switch terminal 7 (with power window system) or
I from door lock/unlock switch terminal 2 (without power window system)
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 14.
When the driver side door is locked by the door lock/unlock switch, the smart entrance control unit receives
a ground signal:
I through body grounds M28, M67 and F118 (QG engine models)
I to door lock/unlock switch terminal 3
I from door lock/unlock switch terminal 14 (with power window system) or
I from door lock/unlock switch terminal 1 (without power window system)
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 13.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied:
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 28
I to interior room lamp terminal 5.
With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates when interior room lamp switch is in
“DOOR” position.
SWITCH OPERATION NJEL0435S02
When interior room lamp switch is in “ON” position, ground is supplied:
I through case grounds of interior room lamp
I to interior room lamp.
With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates.
EL-80
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION NJEL0435S03
When interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior
room lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when: GI
I unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door lock/unlock switch while all doors are closed
I unlock signal is supplied from remote controller while all doors are closed and key is out of the ignition
key cylinder,
MA
I key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
I driver’s door is opened and then closed while key is out of the ignition key cylinder. (However, if the driv- EM
er’s door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver’s door is opened with
the key removed, the timer is operated
The timer is canceled when: LC
I driver’s door is locked,
I driver’s door is opened, or EC
I ignition switch is turned ON.
ON-OFF CONTROL NJEL0435S04 FE
When the driver side door, front passenger door, rear LH or RH door is opened, the interior room lamp turns
on while the interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position.
BATTERY SAVER CL
NJEL0435S11
The interior room lamp is turned OFF automatically with the lamp switch in the “DOOR” position after about
30 minutes, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal. MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-81
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

System Description/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0548
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NJEL0548S01
Power is supplied at all times:
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 9,
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to key switch terminal 1 and
I through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to interior room lamp terminal 1.
When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted:
I through key switch terminal 2
I to time control unit terminal 22.
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 1.
Ground is supplied:
I through body grounds terminals M28 and M67
I to time control unit terminal 16
When the driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (Hatchback) or B308 (Sedan)
I to door switch driver side terminal 3
I from door switch driver side terminal 2
I to time control unit terminal 6.
When any door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through case ground of each door switch
I to each door switch terminal 1
I to time control unit terminal 7.
When the driver side door is unlocked, the time control unit receives a ground signal:
I through body grounds terminals M28 and M67
I to door unlock sensor terminal 2 (RHD models) or 4 (LHD models)
I from door unlock sensor terminal 5 (RHD models) or 2 (LHD models)
I to time control unit terminal 35.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the time control unit, ground is supplied:
I through time control unit terminal 12
I to interior room lamp terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates when interior room lamp switch is in
“DOOR” position.
SWITCH OPERATION NJEL0548S02
When interior room lamp switch is in “ON” position, ground is supplied:
I through case grounds of interior room lamp
I to interior room lamp.
With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp illuminates.
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION NJEL0548S03
When interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the time control unit keeps the interior room lamp
illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
I unlock signal is supplied from driver’s door unlock sensor while all doors are closed
I key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
I driver’s door is opened and then closed
The timer is canceled when:

EL-82
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
I driver’s door is locked,
I driver’s door is opened, or
I ignition switch is turned ON. GI
ON-OFF CONTROL NJEL0548S04
When the driver side door, front passenger door, rear LH or RH door is opened, the interior room lamp turns MA
on while the interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position.
BATTERY SAVER NJEL0548S05 EM
The interior room lamp is turned OFF automatically with the lamp switch in the “DOOR” position after about
30 minutes, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal.
LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-83
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —

Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L — NJEL0436

YEL694D

EL-84
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL695D

EL-85
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail NJEL0549
TERMINAL AND REFERENCE VALVE FOR SMART
ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT NJEL0549S01

Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition Voltage (Approximate values)
No. color

5 L/W Key switch Ignition key Removed , Inserted 0V , 12V

13 P Door lock/unlock switches Neutral , Locks 12V , 0V

14 L Door lock/unlock switches Neutral , Unlocks 12V , 0V

When interior lamp is operated using

28 R/Y Interior room lamp remote controller (Lamp switch in 12V , 0V
“DOOR” position)

29 Y/G Ignition key switch Ignition key is in “ON” position 12V

Rear door switch

39 BR/W Rear door LH or RH: Open , Closed 0V , 12V
(LH or RH)

Front door (Driver side):

43 R/W Front door switch 12V , 0V
Open , Closed

Front door switch Front door (Passenger side):

44 R/W 0V , 12V
(Passenger side) Open , Closed

Rear door switch

45 R/Y Rear door LH or RH: Open , Closed 0V , 12V
(LH or RH)

53 B Ground — 0V

56 R/B Power source — 12V

CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEL0549S02

“ROOM LAMP”

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

MAIA0009E

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.

MBIB0233E

EL-86
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

GI

MA

EM

SIIA1678E LC
6. Touch “ROOM LAMP”.
EC

FE

CL

MKIB0201E
MT
7. Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR” are available for “ROOM LAMP”. AT

AX

SU

BR
MKIB0202E

CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS

ROOM LAMP
NJEL0549S03 ST
Data Monitor Mode
Item (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnosed system RS
IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY IN DETECT Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of electronic key switch.

BT
DOOR SW DR RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (driver side).

DOOR SW AS RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (passenger side).

HA
AS DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).
SC
DR DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).

CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock/unlock switch (lock signal).

CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock/unlock switch (unlock signal).

RKE LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.
IDX
RKE UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.

RKE SEL UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of select unlock signal from remote controller.

EL-87
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NJEL0549S04
Interior Room Lamp Timer Does Not Operate NJEL0549S0401

1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL

WITH CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGNITION SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

MKIB0196E
When ignition switch is ON: IGNITION SW ON
When ignition switch is OFF: IGNITION SW OFF

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 29 (Y/G) and ground.

MKIB0072E

MTBL1422

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

EL-88
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

WITH CONSULT-II GI
Check driver door switch signal (“DR DOOR SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0197E
When driver’s door switch is open: DR DOOR SW ON
When driver’s door switch is closed: DR DOOR SW OFF FE
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Connect smart entrance control unit connector. CL
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and ground.

MT

AT

AX

SU
MKIB0073E

BR

MTBL1423
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
RS
NG © GO TO 3.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-89
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect front door switch (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between front door switch (driver side) harness connector B8 terminals 2 and 3.

SEL325WA

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door
switch (driver side).
NG © Replace front door switch (driver side).

EL-90
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

WITH CONSULT-II GI
Check door lock/unlock switch signal (“CDL LOCK SW” or “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0198E
When door lock/unlock is locked: FE
CDL LOCK SW ON
CDL UNLOCK SW OFF
When door lock/unlock is unlocked:
CDL LOCK SW OFF
CL
CDL UNLOCK SW ON
MT
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminals 13 (P), 14 (L) and ground.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SIIA1567E
ST

RS

BT

MTBL1425 HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. SC
NG © GO TO 5.

IDX

EL-91
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

5 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock/unlock switch harness connector terminals 2 and 3.
I Power window main switch (door lock/unlock switch) (with power window system)

YEL803C
I Door lock/unlock switch (without power window system)

SEL469X

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door lock/
unlock switch.
NG © Replace lock/unlock switch.

EL-92
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

6 CHECK OTHER DOORS SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL

WITH CONSULT-II GI
Check other doors switch signal (“AS DOOR SW”, “RR DOOR SW” or “RR RH DOOR SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0199E
When each doors is open: EACH DOOR SW ON FE
When each doors is closed: EACH DOOR SW OFF

WITHOUT CONSULT-II CL
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit and ground.

MT

AT

AX

SU
MKIB0077E

BR

ST

RS

BT
MTBL1428

OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7. SC

IDX

EL-93
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

7 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminal 1 and ground.

MKIB0234E

MTBL1429

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch.
NG © Replace door switch.

EL-94
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

8 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

WITH CONSULT-II GI
Check key switch signal (“KEY IN DETECT”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0200E
When key is inserted: KEY IN DETECT ON
When key is removed: KEY IN DETECT OFF FE
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 5 (L/W) and ground. CL

MT

AT

AX

MKIB0079E SU

BR

MTBL1430
ST
OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
RS
NG © GO TO 9.

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-95
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

9 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

1. Disconnect key switch connector.
2. Check continuity between 1 and 2.

YEL791C

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

EL-96
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NJEL0549S05
Interior Room Lamp Timer Does Not Cancel NJEL0549S0501
GI
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
WITH CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGNITION SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

EM

LC

EC

MKIB0196E FE
When ignition switch is ON: IGNITION SW ON
When ignition switch is OFF: IGNITION SW OFF
CL
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector. MT
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit and ground.

AT

AX

SU

BR
MKIB0072E

ST

RS

MTBL1432 BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. HA
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse SC

IDX

EL-97
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

WITH CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DR DOOR SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

MKIB0197E
When driver’s door switch is open: DR DOOR SW ON
When driver’s door switch is closed: DR DOOR SW OFF

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Connect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and ground.

MKIB0073E

MTBL1433

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-98
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector. GI
2. Check continuity between front door switch (driver side) harness connector B8 terminals 2 and 3.

MA

EM

LC

SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and driver side FE
door switch.
NG © Replace driver side door switch. CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-99
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

WITH CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch signal (“CDL LOCK SW” or “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.

MKIB0198E
When door lock/unlock is locked:
CDL LOCK SW ON
CDL UNLOCK SW OFF
When door lock/unlock is unlocked:
CDL LOCK SW OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW ON

WITHOUT CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminals 13 (P), 14 (L) and ground.

SIIA1567E

MTBL1435

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 5.

EL-100
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

5 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector. GI
2. Check continuity between door lock/unlock switch terminals.
I Power window main switch (door lock/unlock switch) (with power window system)
MA

EM

LC
YEL803C
I Door lock/unlock switch (without power window system) EC

FE

CL

MT

SEL469X
AT
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door lock/
unlock switch. AX
NG © Replace lock/unlock switch.
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-101
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0437
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NJEL0437S01
SYMPTOM: Interior room lamp timer does not operate.
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 1 and ground.

SEL429X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 6 and ground.

SEL430X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-102
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between door switch terminals 2 and 3. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition FE
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and driver side door switch
NG © Replace driver side door switch. CL

4 CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

MT
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 35 and ground.

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL431X

OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.
RS
5 CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
1. Disconnect front door unlock sensor harness connector. BT
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals.

HA

SC

YEL790C

OK or NG
IDX
OK © Check the following.
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door unlock sensor
NG © Replace door unlock sensor.

EL-103
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

6 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 7 and ground.

SEL432X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 CHECK DOOR SWITCHES

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminal 1 and ground.

SEL794WA

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door switch
NG © Replace door switch.

EL-104
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

8 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 22 and ground. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEL433X
EC
OK or NG
OK © Replace time control unit.
FE
NG © GO TO 9.

9 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

CL
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
MT

AT

AX
YEL791C
SU
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)] BR
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-105
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NJEL0437S02
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not cancel properly.
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 1 and ground.

SEL429X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 6 and ground.

SEL430X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-106
 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition FE
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and driver side door switch
NG © Replace driver side door switch. CL

4 CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

MT
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 35 and ground.

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL431X

OK or NG
ST
OK © Replace time control unit.
NG © GO TO 5.
RS
5 CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
1. Disconnect front door unlock sensor harness connector. BT
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals.

HA

SC

YEL792C

OK or NG
IDX
OK © Check the following.
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door unlock sensor
NG © Replace door unlock sensor.

EL-107
 SPOT AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —

Wiring Diagram — INT/L — NJEL0439

YEL696D

EL-108
SPOT AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL697D

EL-109
 METERS AND GAUGES
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NJEL0441
For details, refer to “ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION” (EL-543) and
“HARNESS LAYOUT” (EL-550).

System Description NJEL0442

UNIFIED CONTROL METER NJEL0442S01
I Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally
by control unit built-in combination meter.
I Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
I Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
I Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER NJEL0442S02

SEL175W

NOTE:
Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT NJEL0442S03
Power is supplied at all times
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to combination meter terminal 29
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 30, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to combination meter terminal 30
Ground is supplied
I through body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67
I to combination meter terminal 32

EL-110
 METERS AND GAUGES
System Description (Cont’d)
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE (QG AND YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL)NJEL0442S09
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides a engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter for water temperature gauge with GI
CAN communication line.
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE (YD ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL) NJEL0442S04 MA
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based
on the resistance of the thermal transmitter.
As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable EM
ground is supplied to terminal 35 of the combination meter for the water temperature gauge. The needle on
the gauge moves from “C” to “H”.
LC
TACHOMETER (QG AND YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL) NJEL0442S10
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolution per minutes (rpm). ECM provides an engine speed sig-
nal to combination meter for tachometer with CAN communication line. EC
TACHOMETER (YD ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL) NJEL0442S05
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). FE
The tachometer is regulated by a signal
I from terminal 32 (Gasoline engine models) or 439 (Diesel engine models) of the ECM
I to combination meter terminal 53 for the tachometer. CL
FUEL GAUGE NJEL0442S06
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. MT
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
I from body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67
I through terminals 33 and 32 of combination meter, AT
I through terminal 1 of the fuel level sensor unit and
I through terminal 4 of the fuel level sensor unit AX
I to combination meter terminal 34 for the fuel gauge.
SPEEDOMETER (MODELS WITH ABS) NJEL0442S11 SU
The combination meter receives a signal from the ABS actuator and electric unit. The speedometer converts
the signal into the vehicle speed displayed.
SPEEDOMETER (MODELS WITHOUT ABS) BR
NJEL0442S07
The combination meter provides a voltage signal to the vehicle speed sensor for the speedometer.
The voltage is supplied ST
I from combination meter terminal 13 for the speedometer
I to terminal 1 of the vehicle speed sensor.
Ground is supplied RS
I from body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67
I through terminals 32 and 14 of combination meter BT
I to teminal 2 of the vehicle speed sensor.
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
HA

SC

IDX

EL-111
 METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter

Combination Meter NJEL0443

CHECK NJEL0443S01

YEL804D

EL-112
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0444

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL786D

EL-113
 METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —

Wiring Diagram — METER — NJEL0446

YEL698D

EL-114
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL699D

EL-115
 METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER — (Cont’d)

YEL700D

EL-116
 METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis

Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis NJEL0447

PERFORMING SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
NJEL0447S01
GI
2. Press both reset buttons on the combination meter and keep
them depressed. MA
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position, while keeping the
reset buttons pressed.
4. Release both reset buttons then self-diagnosis will start. The EM
sequence (A to J) is activated by press the either reset buttons.
NOTE:
If either reset button is not pressed for 20 seconds at each step or
LC
if the ignition switch is turned OFF, the self-diagnosis mode is
exited. EC
Check items Display Remarks

FE
A) Odometer segment test All odo trip meter segments are ON.
CL
SEL434X

MT
This information is not used for service. Please skip this
B) Work instruction code
step. AT
SEL435X

AX
This information is not used for service. Please skip this
C) Software code
step. SU
SEL436X

BR
This information is not used for service. Please skip this
D) EEPROM code
step. ST
SEL437X

RS
This information is not used for service. Please skip this
E) Hardware code
step. BT
SEL438X
HA
This information is not used for service. Please skip this
F) PCB code SC
step.

SEL439X

Tachometer, speedometer, fuel level gauge and water

temperature gauge have sweeping movement test.
Meter/gauge test
G)
(Sweeping movement)
(The meter/gauges operate MIN. , MAX., MAX. , MIN.) IDX
The odo trip meter segment flushes during the sweep
SEL440X
movement.

EL-117
 METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis (Cont’d)

Check items Display Remarks

Error 1
H)
(Bit 0 - Bit 3)
The segment of each bit displays “0”, meaning no failure.
SEL441X If the bit(s) displays figures other than “0”, the item of the
bit has failed.
For details, refer to “Failure chart for Error 1 and Error E”
below.
Error E
I)
(Bit 4 - Bit 7)

SEL442X

Fuel warning lamp is on and odo trip meter segment

J) Fuel warning lamp test
“FUEL” flashes.

SEL443X

Failure Chart for “Error 1” and “Error E” NJEL0447S0101

Displayed figure on the

Bit Detectable items Description of the failure bit

Failure No failure

Speedometer input No input signal

signal When no signal is detected for a few seconds continuously
with the ignition ON, it should be judged as signal failure. 1
(If input signal is detected later, then the judgement will be
0 canceled immediately.) 0
Abnormal input signal
When any signal of frequency which would not exist in nor-
2
mal conditions is detected, it should be judged as signal
failure.

Tachometer input No input signal

signal When no signal is detected for a few seconds continuously
with the ignition ON, it should be judged as signal failure. 1
(If input signal is detected later, then the judgement will be
1 canceled immediately.) 0
Abnormal input signal
When any signal of frequency which would not exist in nor-
2
mal conditions is detected, it should be judged as signal
failure.

Fuel level input sig- Short circuit

nal When short circuit of the signal line is detected for 5 sec- 1
onds or more, it should be judged as short-circuit failure.
2 0
Open circuit
When open circuit of the signal line is detected for 5 sec- 2
onds or more, it should be judged as open-circuit failure.

Water temperature Short circuit

input signal When short circuit of the signal line is detected for a few
1
minutes or more, it should be judged as short-circuit fail-
ure.
3 0
Open circuit
When open circuit of the signal line is detected for a few
2
minutes or more, it should be judged as open-circuit fail-
ure.

EL-118
 METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis (Cont’d)

Displayed figure on the

Bit Detectable items Description of the failure bit
GI
Failure No failure

Outside air tem- Short circuit

perature input sig- When short circuit of the signal line is detected for a few MA
1
nal minutes or more, it should be judged as short-circuit fail-
ure.
4 0 EM
Open circuit
When open circuit of the signal line is detected for a few
2
minutes or more, it should be judged as open-circuit fail- LC
ure.

Reset buttons Short circuit for reset but- Right side reset button has
1 EC
tons failed.
When the short circuit is
continuously detected for 5 Left side reset button has
5 2 0
failed.
minutes or more, it should FE
be judged as short-circuit Both reset buttons have
failure. 3
failed.
CL
6 — “0” displays all the time. 0 0

7 — “0” displays all the time. 1 0

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-119
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0448

PRELIMINARY CHECK NJEL0448S01

SEL361WA

*1: Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis *3: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND *4: Symptom Chart 1 (EL-121)
(EL-117) CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-122) *5: Symptom Chart 2 (EL-121)

EL-120
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0448S02
Symptom Chart 1 (Malfunction is Indicated in
Diagnosis Mode) GI
NJEL0448S0201

Symptom Possible causes Repair order

MA
Odo/trip meter indicates Unified meter control unit Replace unified meter control unit.
malfunction in Diagnosis
mode.
EM
Multiple meter/gauge indi-
cate malfunction in Diagno-
sis mode. LC
One of speedometer/ 1. Meter/Gauge 1. Check resistance of meter/gauge indicating malfunc-
tachometer/fuel gauge/ 2. Unified meter control unit tion. If the resistance is NG, replace the meter/
water temp. gauge indi- gauge.
EC
cates malfunction in Diag- 2. If the resistance of meter/gauge is OK, replace uni-
nosis mode. fied meter control unit.
FE
Symptom Chart 2 (No Malfunction is Indicated in
Diagnosis Mode) NJEL0448S0202 CL
Symptom Possible causes Repair order

One of speedometer/ 1. Sensor signal 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge. MT
tachometer/fuel gauge/ - Vehicle speed signal INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (Refer to
water temp. gauge is mal- - Engine revolution signal EL-123.)
functioning. - Fuel gauge INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL (YD AT
- Water temp. gauge ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL)
2. Unified meter control unit (Refer to EL-125.)
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL (QG
AND YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL)
AX
(Refer to EL-124.)
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
Multiple meter/gauge are EL-126.) SU
malfunctioning. (except INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (YD
odo/trip meter) ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL)
(Refer to EL-127.) BR
INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE SIGNAL (QG
AND YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL)
(Refer to EL-127.) ST
2. Replace unified meter control unit.

Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform PRELIMINARY RS

CHECK, EL-120.

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-121
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0448S03
Power Supply Circuit Check NJEL0448S0301

Terminals Ignition switch position

(+) (−) OFF ACC ON

Battery Battery Battery

29 Ground
voltage voltage voltage

Battery
30 Ground 0V 0V
voltage
YEL813D Battery Battery
64 Ground 0V
voltage voltage

If NG, check the following.

I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 10A fuse [No. 30, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and combination
meter

Ground Circuit Check NJEL0448S0302

Terminals Continuity

32 - Ground Yes

YEL814D

EL-122
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL =NJEL0448S04
Models without ABS NJEL0448S0401
GI
1 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT
1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission.
2. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 13 and ground while quickly turning speed sensor pinion. MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL795C
FE
OK or NG
OK © Vehicle speed sensor signal is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
CL

2 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MT

Check resistance between vehicle speed sensor terminals 1 and 2.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL645WA

OK or NG ST
OK © Check the following.
I Harness between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
I Vehicle speed sensor ground circuit RS
NG © Replace vehicle speed sensor.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-123
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Models with ABS =NJEL0448S0402

1 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT SYSTEM INSPECTION

Perform ABS actuator and electric unit self-diagnosis.
Refer to BR-55, “CONSULT-II Functions”.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check ABS control system. Refer to BR-62, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPEC-
TION”.

2 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and “ABS actuator and electric unit” connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter connector terminal 12 and “ABS actuator and electric unit” connector ter-
minal 10.

YEL815D

OK or NG
OK © Recheck “PRELIMINARY CHECK”.
NG © Check harness for open or short between combination meter and “ABS actuator and
electric unit”. If NG, repair harness or connector.

INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL (QG AND

YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL) NJEL0448S11

1 ECM SYSTEM INSPECTION

Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to “Emission-related Diagnostic Information” (QG engine with EURO-OBD) (EC-37),
“Emission-related Diagnostic Information” (QG engine without EURO-OBD) (EC-429), “Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”
(YD engine) (EC-34).
OK or NG
OK © Recheck “PRELIMINARY CHECK”.
NG © Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for displayed DTC.

EL-124
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL (YD
ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL) =NJEL0448S05
GI
1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between combination meter terminals 53 and ground at idle and 2,000 rpm. MA

EM

LC

EC

YEL816D FE
OK or NG
OK © Engine revolution signal is OK. CL
NG © Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-125
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT =NJEL0448S06

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit connector terminal 1 and ground.

SEL400X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair harness or connector.

2 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK” (EL-128).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.

3 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 34 and fuel level sensor unit connector terminal 4.
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 34 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.

YEL817D

OK or NG
OK © Fuel level sensor unit is OK.
NG © Repair harness or connector.

EL-126
 METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (YD ENGINE
MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL) =NJEL0448S07
GI
1 CHECK THERMAL TRANSMITTER
Refer to “THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK” (EL-128).
MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace.
EM

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT LC

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and thermal transmitter connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 35 and thermal transmitter terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
EC
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 35 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
FE

CL

MT

AT

YEL818D
AX
OK or NG
OK © Thermal transmitter is OK.
SU
NG © Repair harness or connector.

INSPECTION/WATER TEMPERATURE SIGNAL (QG AND BR

YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL) NJEL0448S12

1 ECM SYSTEM INSPECTION ST

Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to “Emission-related Diagnostic Information” (QG engine with EURO-OBD) (EC-37),
“Emission-related Diagnostic Information” (QG engine without EURO-OBD) (EC-429), “Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)”
(YD engine) (EC-34). RS
OK or NG
OK © Recheck “PRELIMINARY CHECK”. BT
NG © Perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for displayed DTC.

HA

SC

IDX

EL-127
 METERS AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection

Electrical Components Inspection =NJEL0449

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK NJEL0449S02
I For removal, refer to FE-5, FE-17, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
Check the resistance between terminals 4 and 1.
Ohmmeter Resistance
Float position mm (in)
(+) (−) value Ω

*1 Full 142.4 (5.606) Approx. 4 - 6

4 1 *2 1/2 88.6 (3.488) 32 - 33

SEL498X
*3 Empty 11.0 (0.433) 80 - 83

*1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper.

THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK NJEL0449S03

YD Engine Models without Common Rail Only NJEL0449S0301
Check the resistance between the terminals of thermal transmitter
and body ground.
Water temperature Resistance

65°C (149°F) Approx. 1,179 - 1,417Ω

91°C (196°F) Approx. 474 - 568Ω

MEL424F

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0449S04

Models without ABS Only NJEL0449S0401
1. Remove vehicle speed sensor from transmission.
2. Turn vehicle speed sensor pinion quickly and measure voltage
across 1 and 2.

CEL219AA

EL-128
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0450

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL701D

EL-129
 WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —

Wiring Diagram — WARN — NJEL0451

YEL702D

EL-130
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL703D

EL-131
 WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

YEL704D

EL-132
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL705D

EL-133
 WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

YEL706D

EL-134
 WARNING LAMPS
Electrical Components Inspection

Electrical Components Inspection NJEL0051

FUEL WARNING LAMP OPERATION CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
NJEL0051S01
GI
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector B29.
3. Connect a resistor (80Ω) between fuel level sensor unit har- MA
ness connector terminals 4 and 1.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
The fuel warning lamp should come on. EM
NOTE:
NEL796 For QG Engine Only LC
ECM might store the DTC P0180 during this inspection. If the DTC
is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after reconnecting the
fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. Refer to EC
EC-48 (With EURO-OBD), 430 (Without EURO-OBD), “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”,
“Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, “ON BOARD DIAG- FE
NOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”.

CL

MT
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK NJEL0051S02
AT
Oil pressure
Continuity
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi)

More than 10 - 20 AX
Engine running (0.10 - 0.20, 0.1 - 0.2, No
1 - 3)
SU
Less than 10 - 20
Engine not running (0.10 - 0.20, 0.1 - 0.2, Yes
1 - 3)
BR
MEL425F
Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch
and body ground.
ST

RS

BT

HA

DIODE CHECK NJEL0051S03

SC
I Check continuity using an ohmmeter.
I Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure at left.
I Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector
instead of on the combination meter assembly. Refer to
EL-130, “WARNING LAMP” wiring diagrams.
IDX
NOTE:
Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before
performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction
SEL901F manual for the tester to be used.

EL-135
 WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NJEL0452

YEL819D

System Description/QG Engine Models and YD

Engine Models with Common Rail NJEL0453
The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to key switch terminal 1, and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 56.
I through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
I to lighting switch terminal 11.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 29.
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 53 through body grounds F118 (QG engine models),
M28 and M67.
When a signal or combined signals is/are received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime will
sound.
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME NJEL0453S01
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, the driver’s door open and driver’s door locked, the
warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
EL-136
 WARNING CHIME
System Description/QG Engine Models and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
I from key switch terminal 2
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 5.
Ground is supplied GI
I from body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (Hatchback) or B308 (Sedan)
I through front door switch (driver side) terminal 3 and 2 MA
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 43.
And, then smart entrance control unit receives any door lock signal.
EM
LIGHT WARNING CHIME NJEL0453S02
With ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied. LC
I from lighting switch terminal 12
I through daytime light control unit terminals 11 and 10 (with daytime light system)
EC
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 17
Ground is supplied
I from front door switch (driver side) terminal 2 FE
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 43.
Front door switch (driver side) terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (Hatchback) or CL
B308 (Sedan).
System Description/YD Engine Models without
MT
Common Rail and K9K Engine Models NJEL0550
The warning chime is controlled by the time control unit.
The warning chime is located in the time control unit. AT
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 9. AX
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to key switch terminal 1. SU
I through 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I to lighting switch terminal 11.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied BR
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 1. ST
Ground is supplied to time control unit terminal 16 through body grounds M28 and M67.
When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the time control unit, the warning chime will sound.
RS
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME NJEL0550S01
With the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, the driver’s door open and driver’s door locked, the
warning chime will sound. Power is supplied BT
I from key switch terminal 2
I to time control unit terminal 22.
HA
Ground is supplied
I from body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (Hatchback) or B308 (Sedan)
I through front door switch (driver side) terminal 3 and 2 SC
I to time control unit terminal 6, and
Ground is interrupted,
I from body grounds M28 and M67
I to time control unit terminal 35
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
IDX
NJEL0550S02
With ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied.
I from lighting switch terminal 12
I to time control unit terminal 10
EL-137
 WARNING CHIME
System Description/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
Ground is supplied
I from front door switch (driver side) terminal 2
I to time control unit terminal 6.
Front door switch (driver side) terminal 3 is grounded through body grounds B9, B21 and D96 (Hatchback) or
B308 (Sedan).

EL-138
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —

Wiring Diagram — CHIME — NJEL0454

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL707D

EL-139
 WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — (Cont’d)

YEL708D

EL-140
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail NJEL0551
GI
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEL0551S01
CONSULT-II executes the following functions by combining data
reception and command transmission via the communication line MA
from smart entrance control unit. CAN communication inspection
and data monitor display.
Diagnostic Items Description
EM
NJEL0551S0101

SMART ENTRANCE diagnosis

position
Diagnosis mode Description LC
The input data to the SMART ENTRANCE control units is dis-
KEY REMINDER Data monitor
played in real time. EC
The input data to the SMART ENTRANCE control units is dis-
LIGHT ON REMINDER Data monitor
played in real time.
FE
SMART ENTRANCE PART NUMBER Displays SMART ENTRANCE part No.

CL

MT
CONSULT-II Basic Operation Procedure NJEL0551S0102
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II to the data AT
link connector, and turn the ignition switch ON.

AX

SU

BR
MAIA0009E

2. Touch “START”.
ST

RS

BT

HA
PIIA0182E

3. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”. SC

IDX

SIIA1678E

EL-141
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the “SELECT TES-
T ITEM” screen.
Data monitor item (KEY REMINDER)
Monitored item Description

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY IN DETECT Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of electronic key switch.

DR DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).

CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock/unlock switch.

RKE LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.

Data monitor item (Light warning chime)

Monitored item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

DR DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).

TAIL LAMP ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.

SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0551S02

First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SMART ENTRANCE”
with CONSULT-II, when perform the each trouble diagnosis.
Symptom Diagnoses/Service procedure Reference page

EL-143, “Power Supply

I Power supply and ground circuit check and Ground Circuit
Check”

EL-144, “Lighting Switch

Light warning chime does not activate. I Lighting switch check
Input Signal Check”

EL-150, “Front Door

I Front door switch (driver side) check Switch (Driver side)
Check”

EL-143, “Power Supply

I Power supply and ground circuit check and Ground Circuit
Check”

EL-147, “Key Switch

Key warning chime does not activate. I Key switch insert signal check
Insert Signal Check”

EL-150, “Front Door

I Front door switch (driver side) check Switch (Driver side)
Check”

EL-143, “Power Supply

All warning chimes do not activate. I Power supply and ground circuit check and Ground Circuit
Check”

With the ignition switch turned OFF and the EL-150, “Front Door
door closed (driver side) turning the lighting I Front door switch (driver side) check Switch (Driver side)
switch ON (1st) activates the chime. Check”

EL-142
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0551S03

1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK GI

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Check the following.
MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0013E
FE

CL

MT

AT
MTBL1438

OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following. SU
I 10A fuse [NO. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)].
I 10A fuse [NO. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)].
I Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse. BR

2 GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK ST

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 53 (B) and ground.

RS

BT

HA

SC
MKIB0014E
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © Check ground circuit for open or short.
IDX

EL-143
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CHECK =NJEL0551S04

1 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check lighting switch (“TAIL LAMP ON”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

MKIB0192E
When lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position:
TAIL LAMP ON ON
When lighting switch is in OFF position:
TAIL LAMP ON OFF

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 17 (R/G) and ground.

MKIB0015E
Condition of switch
Voltage [V]
Lighting switch: 1st or 2nd
Approx. 12V
Lighting switch: OFF
0V
OK or NG
OK © Lighting switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-144
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect lighting switch harness connector. GI
2. Check voltage between lighting switch harness connector E209 terminal 11 (B/R) and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0029E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following. CL
I 10A fuse (No. 38 located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between lighting switch and fuse
MT
3 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
Check harness continuity between lighting switch harness connector E209 terminal 12 (W/R) and smart entrance control AT
unit harness connector M193 terminal 17 (R/G).

AX

SU

BR

ST
MKIB0030E
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
RS
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following.
BT
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch.
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and lighting switch/
daytime light control unit (with daytime light control unit). HA

SC

IDX

EL-145
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)

Check continuity between lighting switch harness connector E209 terminals 11 and 12.

MKIB0031E

MTBL1439

OK or NG
OK © Lighting switch is OK.
NG © Replace lighting switch.

EL-146
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH INSERT SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0551S05

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY IN DETECT”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0193E
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: FE
KEY IN DETECT ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY IN DETECT OFF CL
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 5 (B/L) and ground. MT

AT

AX

SU

MKIB0016E BR
Condition of key switch
Voltage [V]
When key is inserted to ignition key cylinder: ST
Approx. 12V
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
0V RS
OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK. BT
NG © GO TO 2.
HA

SC

IDX

EL-147
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect key switch harness connector.
2. Check voltage between key switch harness connector E173 terminal 1 (R) and ground.

MKIB0032E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12 located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse

3 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

Check harness continuity between key switch harness connector E173 terminal 2 (L/W) and smart entrance control unit
harness connector M193 terminal 5 (L/W).

MKIB0033E
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace harness.

EL-148
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK KEY SWITCH

Check continuity between key switch harness connector M30 terminals 1 and 2. GI

MA

EM

LC

MKIB0034E EC

FE

CL
MTBL1440
MT
OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © Replace key switch.
AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-149
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CHECK =NJEL0551S06

1 CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
I Check front door switch (“DR DOOR SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

MKIB0193E
When driver’s door is open:
DR DOOR SW ON
When driver’s door is closed:
DR DOOR SW OFF

Without CONSULT-II
I Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and ground.

MKIB0018E

MTBL1441

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-150
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector and front door switch (driver side) connector. GI
2. Check the following.
– Harness continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and door switch
(driver side) connector B8 terminal 2 (R). MA
– Harness continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and body ground.

EM

LC

EC

FE
YEL820D

CL

MT

AT
MTBL1442

OK or NG AX
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace harness. SU

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

BR
Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3.

ST

RS

BT

HA
SEL325WA

OK or NG
SC
OK © Driver side door switch is OK.
NG © Replace driver side door switch.

IDX

EL-151
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0455
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0455S01

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 152 153 154 155 156

(DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK)

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
(LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND

SIGNAL CHECK)

SIGNAL CHECK)
SYMPTOM

Light warning chime does not acti-

X X X
vate.

Ignition key warning chime does not

X X X X
activate.

All warning chimes do not activate. X X

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0455S02

Power Supply Circuit Check NJEL0455S0201

YEL821D

Ground Circuit Check NJEL0455S0202

SEL448X

EL-152
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) =NJEL0455S03
GI
1 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit terminal 10 and ground.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL449X

OK or NG FE
OK © Lighting switch is OK.
NG © Check the following. CL
I 10A fuse (No. 38, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and lighting switch/daytime light
control unit MT
I Lighting switch

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-153
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT
SIGNAL CHECK) =NJEL0455S04

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 22 and ground.

SEL433X

OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.

YEL799C

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

EL-154
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR
CHECK) NJEL0455S05
GI
1 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit terminal 35 and ground.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL431X

OK or NG FE
OK © Door unlock sensor is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL

2 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR MT

1. Disconnect door unlock sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals 2 and 5 (RHD models) or 2 and 4 (LHD models).
AT

AX

SU
YEL800C
BR
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit ST
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door unlock sensor
NG © Replace door unlock sensor.
RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-155
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 =NJEL0455S06

1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 1 and ground.

YEL821D

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 6 and ground.

SEL430X

OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
NG © Check voltage between time control unit terminal 6 and body ground with disconnecting
front door switch (driver side).
If approx. 5V is supplied, GO TO 3.
If approx. 5V is not supplied, replace time control unit.

EL-156
 WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEL325WA
EC
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition FE
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and driver side door switch
NG © Replace driver side door switch. CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-157
 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description

System Description NJEL0456

WIPER OPERATION NJEL0456S01
The wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
There are three wiper switch positions:
I LO speed
I HI speed
I INT (Intermittent)
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 20A fuse [No. 25, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to front wiper motor terminal 5.
Low and High Speed Wiper Operation NJEL0456S0101
Ground is supplied to wiper and washer switch terminal 17 through body grounds E30 and E73.
When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
I through terminal 14 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
I through terminal 16 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to wiper motor terminal 1.
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto Stop Operation NJEL0456S0102
With wiper switch turned OFF, wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield base.
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
I from terminal 14 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 2, in order to continue wiper motor operation at low speed.
Ground is also supplied
I through terminal 13 of the front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 4
I through terminal 3 of front wiper motor
I through body grounds E30 and E73.
When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 4 and 5 are connected instead of ter-
minals 4 and 3. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
Intermittent Operation NJEL0456S0103
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 1 to
13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier (INT SW) combined with front wiper switch.
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied to wiper amplifier (WIPER SW INT)
and (ACC).
The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier (INT VR) from wiper volume switch combined with front
wiper and washer switch.
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, intermittent ground is supplied
I through wiper amplifier (OUTPUT) and
I through terminal 14 of front wiper and washer switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 5.
The wiper motor operates at low speed at the desired interval.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the wiper motor operates at low speed
for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the same
manner as the intermittent operation.
WASHER OPERATION NJEL0456S02
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 27, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I through front wiper switch terminals 15 and 18.
I to front washer motor terminal 1.
EL-158
 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description (Cont’d)
When the lever is pulled to the WASHER/FRONT position, ground is supplied
I from body grounds E30 and E73,
I through terminal 17 of the front wiper switch, and GI
I through terminal 22 of the front wiper switch
I to front washer motor terminal 2. MA
With power and ground supplied, the washer motor operates.

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-159
 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —

Wiring Diagram — WIPER — NJEL0457

YEL709D

EL-160
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL452D

EL-161
 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation

Removal and Installation NJEL0060

WIPER ARMS NJEL0060S01
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance “L1” & “L2” immediately before
tightening nut.
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it “OFF”.
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1” & “L2”.
SEL543TA
Clearance “L1”: 23 - 37 mm (0.91 - 1.46 in)
Clearance “L2”: 24 - 38 mm (0.94 - 1.50 in)
I Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper: 21 - 26 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 16 - 19 ft-lb)

I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as

illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose-
ness.

SEL024J

WIPER LINKAGE NJEL0060S02

NEL801

EL-162
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Removal NJEL0060S0201
1. Remove cowl top seal rubber and cowl top cover.
2. Remove wiper motor connector. GI
3. Remove 3 screws that secure wiper motor and wiper frame.
4. Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint. MA
5. Remove wiper linkage.
Be careful not to break ball joint rubber boot.
EM
Installation NJEL0060S0202
I Grease ball joint portion before installation.
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal. LC
Washer Nozzle Adjustment NJEL0061
I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure EC
at left.
Adjustable range: ±15° (In any direction)
FE

CL

YEL822D
MT
Unit: mm (in)

*1 450 (17.72) *5 150 (5.91) AT

*2 225 (8.86) *6 130 (5.12)

*3 380 (14.96) *7 285 (11.22)

AX
*4 165 (6.50) *8 320 (12.60)
SU
*: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
The figure shown is for LHD models.
The layout for RHD models is symmetrically opposite. BR
SEL544T

Washer Tube Layout NJEL0062 ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

GEL268

EL-163
 REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —

Wiring Diagram — WIP/R — NJEL0458

YEL710D

EL-164
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL454D

EL-165
 REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation

Removal and Installation NJEL0301

WIPER ARMS NJEL0301S01
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface. Set
the black center to clearance “E” immediately before tighten-
ing the nut.
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it “OFF”.
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop on the lowest heat wire.
SEL451XA
I Tighten windshield wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
: 13 - 18 N·m (1.3 - 1.8 kg-m, 10 - 13 ft-lb)
I Rear wiper motor assembly mounting bolts
: 4 - 5 N·m (0.4 - 0.5 kg-m, 36 - 44 in-lb)

I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as

illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose-
ness.

SEL024J

Washer Nozzle Adjustment NJEL0302

I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±15° (In any direction)

YEL823D

The diameter of the washer spit circle is less than 30 mm (1.18 in).

SEL452XA

EL-166
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Washer Tube Layout

Washer Tube Layout NJEL0303

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL
SEL453X

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-167
 HEADLAMP WASHER
Wiring Diagram — HLC —

Wiring Diagram — HLC — NJEL0459

YEL455D

EL-168
 HEADLAMP WASHER
Washer Tube Layout

Washer Tube Layout NJEL0376

GI

MA

EM

NEL802 LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-169
 HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —

Wiring Diagram — HORN — NJEL0460

YEL711D

EL-170
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —

Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — NJEL0461

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL712D

EL-171
 CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —

Wiring Diagram — CLOCK — NJEL0462

YEL713D

EL-172
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

System Description/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail =NJEL0552
The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The rear window defogger
GI
operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times MA
I through 20A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (B7 relay models) or 3 (B6 relay models)
I through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)] EM
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 (B6 relay models).
I through 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)] LC
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 56.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)] EC
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 29. FE
Ground is supplied to terminal 5 (with manual A/C) or 1 (with auto A/C) of the rear window defogger switch
through body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67.
When the rear defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied CL
I through terminal 3 (with manual A/C) or 9 (with auto A/C) of the rear defogger switch
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 22.
MT
Terminal 31 of smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied AT
I through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay (B6 relay models) or
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger relay (B7 relay models)
I to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger. AX
The rear window defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window. SU
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-173
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

System Description/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0463
The rear window defogger system is controlled by the time control unit. The rear window defogger operates
only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
I through 20A fuse [No. 7, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (B7 relay models) or 3 (B6 relay models)
I through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 (B6 relay models).
I through 15A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to time control unit terminal 9.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and
I to time control unit terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to terminal 5 of the rear window defogger switch through body grounds M28 and M67.
When the rear defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
I through terminal 3 of the rear defogger switch
I to time control unit terminal 3.
Terminal 13 of time control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
I through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay (B6 relay models) or
I through terminal 3 of the rear window defogger relay (B7 relay models)
I to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger.
The rear window defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.

EL-174
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0533

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL714D

EL-175
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF —

Wiring Diagram — DEF — =NJEL0464

YEL715D

EL-176
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL716D

EL-177
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)

YEL717D

EL-178
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail NJEL0553
GI
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR SMART
ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT NJEL0553S01

WIRE
MA
TERMINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC)
COLOR

Multifunction switch (Rear window defogger

0V
EM
Multifunction switch (Rear window switch) ON
22 L/Y
defogger switch) signal Multifunction switch (Rear window defogger
switch) OFF
Battery voltage LC
29 Y/G IGN power supply — Battery voltage
EC
Multifunction switch (Rear window defogger
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger relay control sig- switch) ON
31 W
nal Multifunction switch (Rear window defogger FE
0V
switch) OFF

53 B Ground — 0V CL
56 R/B BAT power supply — Battery voltage

TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR MT

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
SWITCH) NJEL0553S02 AT
WIRE
TERMINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC)
COLOR
AX
1 B Ground — 0V

9 L/Y Rear window defogger switch signal Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage
SU
10 L/R Rear window defogger indicator signal Rear window defogger switch ON Battery voltage

PRELIMINARY CHECK NJEL0553S03

BR
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SMART ENTRANCE”
with CONSULT-II, when perform the each trouble diagnosis.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-179
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION
=NJEL0553S04

1 CHECK FUSE INSPECTION

Check the following.

MTBL1443

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace fuse.

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between smart entrance control unit connector M194, M195 terminals 29 and 56 and ground.

MIIA0083E

MTBL1444

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

EL-180
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit connector M195 terminal 53 and ground. GI

MA

EM

LC

MIIA0084E EC

FE

CL
MTBL1445

OK or NG
MT
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace harness.
AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-181
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 31 and ground.

MIIA0085E

MTBL1446

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
and rear window defogger relay.
I Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance
control unit.
I Rear window defogger relay. Refer to EL-189, “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY”.
I Rear window defogger filament. Refer to EL-190, “FILAMENT CHECK” and EL-191,
“FILAMENT REPAIR”.
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-182
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
=NJEL0553S05

1 HARNESS INSPECTION GI
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect Multifunction switch connector and smart entrance control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between Multifunction switch and smart entrance control unit. MA

EM

LC

EC

SKIA1434E FE

CL

MT

MTBL1447
4. Check continuity between Multifunction switch and body ground.
AT

AX

SU
MTBL1448

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace harness or connector. ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-183
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ON SIGNAL

1. Connect Multifunction switch connector and smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check continuity between Multifunction switch and body ground when rear window defogger switch is operated.

SKIA1435E

MTBL1449

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Replace Multifunction switch.

EL-184
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR LAMP DOES
NOT ILLUMINATE =NJEL0553S06
GI
1 CHECK POSITION OF IGNITION SWITCH
Is ignition switch ON?
MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Rear window defogger does not operate if ignition switch is not ON.
EM

2 CHECK OPERATION OF REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER LC

Does rear window defogger operate when rear window defogger switch is turned ON? (Does fogging disappear?)
OK or NG EC
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © EL-183, “Rear Window Defogger Does Not Operate” item. FE

3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR LAMP SIGNALS CL

Disconnect Multifunction switch connector. Check voltage between Multifunction switch terminal 10 (L/R) and body ground.

MT

AT

AX

SU
SKIA1433E

BR

ST

MTBL1450
RS
OK or NG
OK © Replace Multifunction switch.
BT
NG © Malfunction in harness between Multifunction switch and rear window defogger relay.

HA

SC

IDX

EL-185
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0465
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NJEL0465S01
SYMPTOM: Rear window defogger does not activate, or does
not go off after activating.
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between time control unit harness terminal 13 and ground.

SEL455X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear window defogger relay
(Refer to EL-189.)
I Rear window defogger circuit
I Rear window defogger filament
(Refer to EL-190.)
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
3. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 13 and ground.

SEL456X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Rear window defogger relay
I Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
and rear window defogger relay
I Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and time control unit

EL-186
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check continuity between time control unit terminal 3 and ground. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEL457X
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
FE
NG © Check the following.
I Rear window defogger switch
(Refer to EL-189.) CL
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and rear window defogger switch
I Rear window defogger switch ground circuit
MT
4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit terminals 1 or 9 and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEL447X
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
RS
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse or 15A fuse [No. 10 or No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-187
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

5 CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between time control unit terminal 16 and ground.

SEL448X

Yes © Replace time control unit.

No © Repair harness or connectors.

EL-188
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Electrical Components Inspection

Electrical Components Inspection =NJEL0076

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
NJEL0076S01
GI
Condition Continuity
MA
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2

No current supply No EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SEL970W
MT
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (MANUAL A/C
MODELS) NJEL0076S02
AT
Check continuity between terminals when rear window defogger
switch is pushed and released.
AX
Terminals Condition Continuity

Rear window defogger

switch is pushed.
Yes SU
3-5
Rear window defogger
No
switch is released. BR
YEL824D

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (AUTO A/C

MODELS) ST
NJEL0076S03
Check continuity between Multifunction switch and body ground
when rear window defogger switch is operated. RS
Terminals
Continuity
Multifunction switch BT
(−)
Connector Terminal (wire color) Press switch Release switch

M97 9 (L/Y) Ground YES NO HA

SKIA1435E

SC

IDX

EL-189
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Check

Filament Check =NJEL0077

1. Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.

SEL263

I When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of

the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire
with your finger.

SEL122R

2. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts.

SEL265

3. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along
filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes
the point.

SEL266

EL-190
 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Repair

Filament Repair NJEL0078

REPAIR EQUIPMENT
1)
NJEL0078S01
Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)
GI
2) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
3) Drawing pen MA
4) Heat gun
5) Alcohol
6) Cloth
EM

LC
REPAIRING PROCEDURE NJEL0078S02
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a EC
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen. FE
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive sil-
ver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap CL
existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of
the break.
BE540
MT
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for con-
tinuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver AT
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
AX

SU

BR
SEL012D

5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis- ST
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area
and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired
area dry for 24 hours. RS

BT

HA
SEL013D

SC

IDX

EL-191
 AUDIO
System Description

System Description =NJEL0497

AUDIO SYSTEM WITHOUT DISPLAY NJEL0497S08
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in the fusible link and fuse block)
I to audio unit terminal 9.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to audio unit terminal 3.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Audio signals are supplied
I through audio unit terminals 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
I to terminals 1 and 2 of front door speaker LH and RH,
I to terminals 1 and 2 of rear door speaker LH and RH and
I to terminals 1 and 2 of pillar tweeter LH and RH (with 6 speakers)
AUDIO SYSTEM WITH DISPLAY NJEL0497S09
Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I to audio unit terminals 3 and 4, and
I to display terminals 21 and 23.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to audio unit terminal 2,
I to multifunction switch terminal 6 and
I to display terminal 19.
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is also supplied
I through body grounds M28, M67 and F118 (QG engine models)
I to multifunction switch terminal 1 and
I to display terminals 22 and 24.
Audio signals are supplied
I through audio unit terminals 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
I to terminals 1 and 2 of front door speaker LH and RH
I to terminals 1 and 2 of rear door speaker LH and RH
I to terminals 1 and 2 of tweeter LH and RH
AV COMMUNICATION LINE NJEL0497S10
Audio system is contained and the AV communication line is connected as followings.
I Display unit terminals 12 and 13, and
I Multifunction switch terminals 12 and 14.
I Multifunction switch terminals 11 and 13, and
I Audio unit terminals 31 and 32.
I Audio unit terminals 35 and 36, and
I AV and NAVI control unit terminals 47 and 48 (with navigation system).
The operation is controlled by operation signals from multifunction switch, then audio screen is displayed.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM OF GUIDANCE VOICE OPERATION NJEL0497S11
When navigation system is used, guidance voice signal is supplied
I from AV and NAVI control unit terminals 7 and 8
I to audio unit terminals 35 and 36.
Navigation system of guidance voice will be sounded.

EL-192
 AUDIO
System Description (Cont’d)
NATS AUDIO LINK NJEL0497S12
Description
The link with the NATS IMMU implies that the audio unit can basically only be operated if connected to the
NJEL0497S1201
GI
matching NATS IMMU to which the audio unit was initially fitted on the production line.
Since radio operation is impossible after the link with the NATS is disrupted theft of the audio unit is basically
useless since special equipment is required to reset the audio unit. MA
Initialization process for audio units that are linked to the NATS IMMU
I Perform initialization with CONSULT-II EM
I For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
Normal operation
Each time the audio unit is switched on afterwards, the audio unit code will be verified between the audio unit LC
and the NATS before the audio unit becomes operational.
When the radio is locked
When NATS link problems occur “SECURE” message will be displayed in three ways indicating three differ- EC
ent NATS link problems.
“Secure” on a red background indicates that there is a problem in the link between Navi control unit and Audio,
suggesting that there is either a Navigation system fault or the Navi control unit has previously been fitted in FE
another vehicle.
“Secure” on a green background indicates that there is a problem in the link between NATS IMMU and Audio,
suggesting that there is an audio fault or the audio unit has previously been fitted in another vehicle. CL
“Secure” on a yellow background indicates that the transponder (NATS key) is not working correctly or it has
previously been fitted in another vehicle.
When a “Secure” message (of any type) is displayed, it can be cleared by re-initializing the NATS system using MT
CONSULT-II and the associated Immobilizer PIN code (there is no need to return the audio to a Clarion ser-
vice centre). If re-initializing fails to clear a “Secure” message then the component (identified by background
color) is faulty and should be replaced. AT
NOTE:
When the “Secure” is displayed on VFD display or audio unit, the communication of IMMU and radio, radio AX
unit or transponder has problem.
Service Procedure NJEL0497S1202 SU
Item Service procedure Description

Battery disconnection No additional action required. — BR

Radio needs repair Repair needs to be done by authorized
representative of radio manufacturer since
radio cannot be operated unless it is reset — ST
to NEW state, using special decoding
equipment.
RS
Replacement of radio by new part No additional action required. Radio is delivered in NEW state.

Transferring radio to another vehicle/ Radio needs to be reset by using CON-

replacement of radio by an “old” part SULT-II and the associated Immobi PIN BT
—
code (there is no need to return the audio
or Navi units to a Clarion service centre).
HA
Replacement of IMMU The communication between IMMU and After switching on the radio, it will display
radio need to be reset by using CON- “SECURE” on a green background.
SULT-II and the associated Immobi PIN
code.
SC
No communication from IMMU to radio 1. If NATS is malfunctioning, check NATS After switching on the radio, the display
system. unit will display “SECURE” on a green
2. After NATS is repaired, reset radio to background. Further use of radio is
“Secure” on a green background state impossible until communication is estab-
by using CONSULT-II and the associ- lished again, or after radio is reset by IDX
ated Immobilizer PIN code (there is no using CONSULT-II and the associated
need to return the audio to a Clarion Immobilizer PIN code (there is no need to
service centre). return the audio to a Clarion service cen-
tre).

EL-193
 AUDIO
System Description (Cont’d)
SPEED DEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL NJEL0497S13
Description NJEL0497S1301
If activated, the radio output volume will be automatically adjusted to compensate for increased driving noises
at higher driving speeds.
The radio receives a speed signal from the combination meter and selects the output volume.
PERSONAL AUDIO SETTINGS NJEL0497S14
Description NJEL0497S1401
The radio is designed to store several settings (volume, bass, treble, preset stations and level of speed
dependent volume control) with every NATS ignition key used. Up to a maximum of 4 NATS keys can be reg-
istered. During the communication mentioned under “Anti-Theft System”, the radio will recognize the used
ignition key and select the accompanying settings.

Component Parts Location NJEL0554

EL-543, “ELECTRIC UNIT LOCATION”.

EL-194
 AUDIO
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0466
MODELS WITHOUT VDF/LCD MONITOR NJEL0466S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL718D

EL-195
 AUDIO
Schematic (Cont’d)
MODELS WITH VDF MONITOR NJEL0466S02

YEL723D

EL-196
 AUDIO
Schematic (Cont’d)
MODELS WITH LCD DISPLAY NJEL0466S03

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL729D

EL-197
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —

Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — NJEL0467

MODELS WITHOUT VDF/LCD DISPLAY NJEL0467S03

YEL719D

EL-198
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL720D

EL-199
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

YEL721D

EL-200
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL722D

EL-201
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)
MODELS WITH VDF DISPLAY NJEL0467S04

YEL724D

EL-202
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL725D

EL-203
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

YEL726D

EL-204
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL727D

EL-205
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

YEL728D

EL-206
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)
MODELS WITH LCD DISPLAY NJEL0467S05

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL730D

EL-207
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

YEL731D

EL-208
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL732D

EL-209
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

YEL733D

EL-210
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL734D

EL-211
 AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — (Cont’d)

YEL735D

EL-212
 AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0385

AUDIO UNIT NJEL0385S05
GI
Symptom Possible causes Repair order

Audio unit inoperative (no 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse. Turn ignition switch ON and verify MA
digital display and no 2. Poor audio unit case ground that battery positive voltage is present at the termi-
sound from speakers). 3. Audio unit nal of audio unit.
2. Check audio unit case ground.
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
EM
Audio unit presets are lost 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse and verify that battery positive volt-
when ignition switch is 2. Audio unit age is present at the terminal of audio unit. LC
turned OFF. 2. Remove audio unit for repair.

Individual rear speaker is 1. Each speaker 1. Check speaker.

noisy or inoperative. 2. Output circuit to each speaker 2. Check the output circuits to each speaker
EC
I between audio unit and speaker amp.
I between speaker amp. and each speaker.
FE
AM/FM stations are weak 1. Roof antenna 1. Check roof antenna.
or noisy. 2. Audio unit ground 2. Check audio unit ground condition.
3. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair. CL
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps 2. Check ground bonding straps.
engine running. 3. Ignition condenser or rear window defog- 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger MT
ger noise suppressor condenser noise suppressor condenser.
4. Ignition coil or secondary wiring 4. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring.
5. Audio unit 5. Remove audio unit for repair. AT
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna.
accessories on (switch 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground.
AX
pops and motor noise). 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory.

Inspection SU
NJEL0221
AUDIO UNIT NJEL0221S01
All voltage inspections are made with: BR
I Ignition switch ON or ACC
I Audio unit ON
ST
I Audio unit connected (If audio unit is removed for inspection, supply a ground to the case using a jumper
wire.)
ANTENNA RS
NJEL0221S02
Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body.
I If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface). BT
I If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit.

HA

SC

IDX

EL-213
 AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna

Location of Antenna NJEL0468

YEL825D

Antenna Rod Replacement NJEL0469

REMOVAL NJEL0469S01
1. Remove front portion of headliner.
2. Remove antenna base cover.
3. Remove antenna base fixing nut and antenna base.

YEL826D

EL-214
 VFD DISPLAY
System Description

System Description NJEL0555

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH SYSTEM NJEL0555S01
Refer to Owner′s Manual for multifunction switch operating instruc-
GI
tions.
Using the multifunction switch at the center of the instrument panel, MA
it can be operating the following systems:
I Auto A/C system
I Board computer EM
I Audio system
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NJEL0555S02
LC
Power is Supplied at All Times NJEL0555S0201
I through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to display unit terminal 23
EC
I to audio unit terminals 3 and 4.
When Ignition Switch is in ACC or ON Position, Power FE
is Supplied NJEL0555S0202
I through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)] CL
I to display unit terminal 24,
I to multifunction switch terminal 6 and
I to audio unit terminal 2. MT
When Ignition Switch is in ON or START Position,
Power is Supplied NJEL0555S0203
AT
I through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to display unit terminal 22.
AX
Ground is Supplied NJEL0555S0204
I to multifunction switch terminal 1 and
I to display unit terminal 21 SU
I through body grounds M28, M67 and F118 (Gasoline engine
models). BR
AV COMMUNICATION LINE NJEL0555S03
Display unit is communicated by the following unit with communi-
cation line.
ST
I Multifunction switch
I Audio unit RS
I Auto A/C unit
I Combination meter
BT
Display unit received operation signal from multifunction switch,
and it send operation signal to audio unit, auto A/C unit or combi-
nation meter. HA
BOARD COMPUTER NJEL0555S04
Refer to Owner′s Manual for board computer operating instruc-
tions.
SC
Board computer is monitoring to the following five type information.

IDX

EL-215
 VFD DISPLAY
System Description (Cont’d)
1. Press “INFO” switch to display vehicle information display.
2. Indication can be changed by in the following order by push-
ing multifunction switch.
I Range
I Journey distance
I Journey time
I Average fuel economy
I Average vehicle speed

YEL827D

Board computer Display

Range (km or MILES) Displays range to empty with a range of 000.0 to 999.9.

Journey distance (km or MILES) Displays journey distance with a range of 000.0 to 9999

Journey time Displays journey time with a range of 0000:00:00 to 9999:59:59.

Average fuel consumption (/100 km or

Displays fuel consumption with a range of 00.0 to 999.
MPG)

Average vehicle speed (km/h or MPH) Displays average vehicle speed with a range of 000 to 999.

Range NJEL0555S0401
I The elapsed time indication provides driver with an estimation
of the distance that can be driven before refuelling.The range
is conducted by fuel tank level sensor unit (fuel remaining),
ECM pulse signal (fuel consumption) and vehicle speed signal.
I Indication will be renewed every 30 seconds.
I When fuel remaining is less than approx. 7.8  (6-7/8 Imp qt),
indication will blink as a warning. If the fuel remaining less than
approx. 6.8  (6 Imp qt), “– –.–” will be indicated. In this case,
the mode will change to the RANGE mode automatically even
though the display is showing a different item. (See NOTE.)
I The range mode includes a low range warning feature: when
the fuel level is low, the range mode is automatically selected
and the digits blink in order to draw the driver′s attention. Press
the “INFO” switch if you wish to return to the mode that was
selected before the warning occurred. The range mark will
remain blinking until next refuelling. When the fuel level drops
even lower, the range display will change to “– – – –”.
Journey Distance NJEL0555S0402
I Journey distance indication is conducted by vehicle speed sig-
nal.
I If journey distance is reset, journey time will be reset at the
same time.
I When pushing “INFO” switch more than approximately 1
second, driving distance will be reset.
Journey Time NJEL0555S0403
I Journey time indication is conducted by integration of ignition
ON time.
I If journey time is reset, journey distance will be reset at the
same time.
Average Fuel Consumption NJEL0555S0404
I Average fuel consumption indication is conducted by ECM
pulse signal and vehicle speed signal after system is reset.
I Indication will be renewed every 30 seconds.
EL-216
 VFD DISPLAY
System Description (Cont’d)
I When pushing “INFO” switch more than approximately 1
second, average fuel economy will be reset.
I If average fuel consumption is reset, average vehicle speed GI
will be reset at the same time.
I After reset operation, the display shows “– –. –” until the
vehicle is driven 500 m (1,600 ft) or 30 seconds has passed. MA
Average Vehicle Speed NJEL0555S0405
I Average vehicle speed indication is conducted by running dis- EM
tance and running time.
I Indication will be renewed every 30 seconds.
I When pushing “INFO” switch more than approximately 1
LC
second, average speed will be reset.
I If average vehicle speed is reset, average fuel consumption EC
will be reset at the same time.
I After reset operation, the displays shows “– –.–” for 30 sec-
onds. FE
HOW TO CHANGE/RESET INDICATION NJEL0555S05
Indication can be changed by in following order by pushing “INFO” CL
switch less than approximately 1 second.
RANGE , JOURNEY DISTANCE , JOURNEY TIME , AVER-
AGE FUEL CONSUMPTION , AVERAGE VEHICLE SPEED MT
I Continuous pushing the “INFO” switch (more than 3 second)
can reset the indication of journey distance (trip), journey time
(hour meter), average fuel consumption and average vehicle AT
speed.
NOTE:
After the display changes automatically, the indication can be AX
changed to the last mode by pushing the switch. In this case, the
cursor will blink as a warning.
SU

BR

Component Parts and Harness Connector and ST

Harness Connector Location NJEL0556
For details, refer to “ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION” (EL-543) and
“HARNESS LAYOUT” (EL-550). RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-217
 VFD DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram — COMM —

Wiring Diagram — COMM — NJEL0557

YEL736D

EL-218
VFD DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram — COMM — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL737D

EL-219
 VFD DISPLAY
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit

Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit NJEL0558

TERMINALS
CONDITION
(+)
SIGNAL VOLTAGE
TERMI- WIRE (–) IGNITION
OPERATION
NAL COLOR SWITCH

Communica-
Display the vehicle information
4 R Ground tion signal ON
screen.
(AV-ME)

SKIA0169E

Shield
5 — — — — —
ground

Communica-
Perform various settings on the
6 G Ground tion signal ON
vehicle information screen.
(ME-AV)

SKIA0170E

Communica-
7 B/W Ground tion signal ON —
(+)

SKIA0175E

Communica-
9 L Ground tion signal ON —
(−)

SKIA0176E

Shield
11 – Ground — — —
ground

A/C commu-
13 L/R Ground nication sig- ON —
nal (AV-AC)

SKIA0172E

A/C commu-
14 L/W Ground nication sig- ON —
nal (AC-AV)

SKIA0173E

EL-220
 VFD DISPLAY
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit (Cont’d)

TERMINALS
CONDITION
(+)
SIGNAL VOLTAGE
GI
TERMI- WIRE (–) IGNITION
OPERATION
NAL COLOR SWITCH
MA
Shield
15 — — — — —
ground
EM

A/C clock LC
16 L Ground ON —
signal

EC
SKIA0174E

FE
Vehicle
When vehicle speed is approx. 20
19 L/B Ground speed signal ON
km/h (12 MPH)
CL
(2-pulse)

ELF1080D MT
21 B Ground — — — —

Ignition sig- AT
22 Y/G Ground ON — —
nal

23 Y Ground
Battery
OFF — Battery voltage AX
power

24 P Ground ACC signal ACC — —

SU

BR

Terminals and Reference Value for ST

Multifunction Switch NJEL0559

TERMINALS RS
CONDITION
(+)
SIGNAL DATA
(–)
TERMINAL
WIRE IGNITION
OPERATION BT
COLOR SWITCH

1 B Ground Ground ON — Apporox. 0V

HA
6 P Ground ACC ACC — Battery voltage

SC
Communication
11 L Ground ON —
signal (+)

SKIA0175E IDX

EL-221
 VFD DISPLAY
Terminals and Reference Value for Multifunction Switch (Cont’d)

TERMINALS
CONDITION
(+)
SIGNAL DATA
WIRE (–) IGNITION
TERMINAL OPERATION
COLOR SWITCH

Communication
12 B/W Ground ON —
signal (+)

SKIA0175E

Communication
13 P Ground ON —
signal (−)

SKIA0176E

Communication
14 L Ground ON —
signal (−)

SKIA0176E

15 — Ground Shield ground ON — —

16 — Ground Shield ground ON — —

Trouble Diagnosis NJEL0637

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION NJEL0637S01
Description NJEL0637S0101
Self-diagnosis items are as follows.
I Screen of all segments check
I Software version and hardware version of display unit are dis-
played on the upper zone of the screen. (This information is not
used for service. Skip this step.)
I Dimming steps and levels check
I Can be checked communication line between A/C auto amp.,
audio unit, multifunction switch, combination meter and display
unit, and displays the results on the upper zone of the screen.

EL-222
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
PERFORMING SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE NJEL0637S02
Operation Procedures
1. Start the engine.
NJEL0637S0201
GI
2. Turn the audio system off.
3. Pressing the “MOD” switch and “CLOCK” switch together for MA
2 second.
4. When self-diagnosis activated, then all segment will be indi-
cated. For display unit self-diagnosis result items, refer to EM
“SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT ITEM” below.
NOTE:
YEL828D
If any button is not pressed for 20 seconds at each step or if the LC
ignition switch is turned OFF, the self-diagnosis mode is exited.
CAUTION: EC
If self-diagnosis cannot activate, refer to EL-231, “Self-Diag-
nosis Does Not Perform”.
Self-Diagnosis Result Item FE
NJEL0637S0202
Display of All Segments Indicate
CL

MT
This mode is checking the display of all segments.
If any of the segment is not displayed, replace the display unit. AT
Backlight Dimming Check
I When lighting switch is first or second position, display is dim-
ming. This mode is checking the dimmer position. AX
I The backlight check where there is an automatic change of
brightness level (4 steps) every 2 seconds. At the end of the
backlight check, it is necessary to press any button to advance SU
to the next check.
Communication Line Circuit Check BR
MKIB0213E I Displays the self-diagnosis results on the upper zone of the
screen. If NG, error code “1” is displayed on upper zone of
screen digits 7, 8 and 9. ST
I Display unit can check communication line open circuit
between display unit and communication control units.
RS
Screen of upper zone Possible case Trouble diagnosis

Error code “1” is displayed on digit 7

BT

The circuit between display unit and combi- Refer to EL-228, “Combination meter Cir-
nation meter is open. cuit Check.
HA

SC
MKIB0214E

Error code “1” is displayed on digit 8

The circuit between display unit, multifunc- Refer to EL-229, “AV Communication Line
tion switch and audio unit is/are open. Check”.
IDX

MKIB0223E

EL-223
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

Screen of upper zone Possible case Trouble diagnosis

Error code “1” is displayed on digit 9

The circuit between display unit and A/C Refer to EL-231, “A/C Auto Amp. Circuit
auto amp. is open. Check” .

MKIB0224E

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR

DISPLAY UNIT NJEL0637S03

1 CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses in display are blown.

MTBL1461

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer
to EL-12, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.

EL-224
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Disconnect display connector. GI

MA

EM

LC

MKIB0215E EC
2. Check voltage between display unit connector and ground.

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX
MTBL1462

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
SU
NG © Check harness for open or short between display and fuse.
BR
3 GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Check continuity between display unit harness connector M99 terminal 21 (B) and ground. ST

RS

BT

HA

MKIB0216E SC
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © Check ground harness.
IDX

EL-225
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH NJEL0637S04

1 CHECK FUSES
Check the fuse below.

MTBL1463

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer
to EL-12, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”.

2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.

MKIB0103E
2. Check voltage between multifunction switch and ground.

MTBL1464

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check harness for open or short between multifunction switch and fuse.

EL-226
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

3 GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector M97 terminal 1 (B) and ground. GI

MA

EM

LC

MKIB0104E EC
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
FE
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © Check ground harness.
CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-227
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0637S05

1 COMMUNICATION LINE (MA-AV, AV-ME) CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Disconnect the display unit connector and combination meter connector.

YEL829D
2. Check continuity between display unit and ground.

MTBL1465
3. Check continuity between display unit and combination meter.

MTBL1466

OK or NG
OK © Check combination meter.
NG © Replace harness or connector.

EL-228
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
AV COMMUNICATION LINE CHECK NJEL0637S06

1 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CIRCUIT CHECK GI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

MA

EM

LC

EC
MKIB0219E
2. Disconnect display unit connector and multifunction switch connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit and multifunction switch. FE

CL

MT

MTBL1467
4. Check continuity between display unit and ground.
AT

AX

SU

MTBL1468 BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. ST
NG © Replace harness or connector.

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-229
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

2 AUDIO UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

YEL830D
2. Disconnect audio unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch and audio unit.

MTBL1469
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch and ground.

MTBL1470

OK or NG
OK © Replace display unit.
NG © Replace harness or connector.

EL-230
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
A/C AUTO AMP. CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0637S07

1 A/C AUTO AMP. AND DISPLAY UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK GI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit and A/C auto amp. MA

EM

LC

EC

MKIB0220E FE

CL

MT

AT
MTBL1471
4. Check continuity between display unit and ground. AX

SU

BR

ST
MTBL1472

OK or NG
RS
OK © Check A/C auto amp. Refer to ATC-29, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”.
NG © Replace harness or connector.
BT
SELF-DIAGNOSIS DOES NOT PERFORM NJEL0637S08

1 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CHECK HA

Check multifunction switch power and ground circuit. Refer to EL-226, “Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Multi-
function Switch”.
© GO TO 2.
SC

2 DISPLAY UNIT CHECK

Check display unit power and ground circuit. Refer to EL-224, “Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display Unit”.
© GO TO 3. IDX

EL-231
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M53.
2. Perform self-diagnosis mode. Refer to EL-223, “Performing Self-Diagnosis Mode”.
Does Self-diagnosis activated?
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © AV communication line check. Refer to EL-229, “AV Communication Line Check”.

4 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.

YEL830D
2. Check continuity between multifunction switch and audio unit.

MTBL1473
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch and ground.

MTBL1474

OK or NG
OK © Replace display unit.
NG © Replace harness or connector.

EL-232
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS (ONLY) ARE
INEFFECTIVE (REAR DEFOGGER CONTROL
EXCLUDED) =NJEL0637S09
GI
1 DISPLAY SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Perform self-diagnosis display unit. Refer to EL-223, “Performing Self-Diagnosis Mode”. MA
2. All VFD display segments are ON.
OK or NG EM
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace display unit.
LC
2 A/C AUTO AMP. AND DISPLAY UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK
EC
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector and display unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit and A/C auto amp. FE

CL

MT

AT

MKIB0220E
AX

SU

BR

ST
MTBL1475
4. Check continuity between display unit and ground. RS

BT

HA

MTBL1476
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace harness or connector.
IDX

EL-233
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

3 A/C–AV, AV–AC, AC–CLK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CHECK

1. Connect A/C auto amp. connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between display unit and ground.

MKIB0222E

MTBL1477

OK or NG
OK © Replace display unit.
NG © Replace A/C auto amp.

EL-234
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)
NO AVERAGE SPEED DISPLAYED/LHD MODELS =NJEL0637S10

1 DISPLAY SELF-DIAGNOSIS GI
1. Perform self-diagnosis display unit. Refer to EL-223, “Performing Self-Diagnosis Mode”.
2. All VFD display segments are ON.
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace display unit. EM

2 HARNESS CHECK LC
1. Disconnect display unit connector and combination meter.
2. Check the following.
EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

YEL831D ST
– Continuity between display unit connector M99 terminal 19 (L/B) and combination meter connector M171 terminal 56
(L/B).
Continuity should exist. RS
– Continuity between display unit connector M99 terminal 19 (L/B) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace harness or connector. HA

SC

IDX

EL-235
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

3 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK

Connect combination meter connector and display unit connector.
With CONSULT-ll
1. Lift up drive wheels.

MKIB0058E
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check signal between display unit connector M99 terminal 19 (L/B) and ground when rotating wheels with engine at
idle. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.)

ELF1080D

Without CONSULT-ll
1. Lift up drive wheels.

MKIB0058E
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check voltage between display unit connector M99 terminal 19 (L/B) and ground when rotating wheels with engine at
idle.
Voltage: Approximately 0 - 5V
OK or NG
OK © Replace display unit.
NG © Check combination meter system. Refer to EL-117, “Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis”.

NO FUEL INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED NJEL0637S11

1 DISPLAY SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Perform self-diagnosis display unit. Refer to EL-223, “Performing Self-Diagnosis Mode”.
2. All VFD display segments are ON.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace display unit.

EL-236
 VFD DISPLAY
Trouble Diagnosis (Cont’d)

2 COMMUNICATION LINE (MA-AV, AV-ME) CIRCUIT CHECK

1. Disconnect the display unit connector and combination meter connector. GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

YEL829D AT
2. Check continuity between display unit and ground.

AX

SU

MTBL1478
BR
3. Check continuity between display unit and combination meter.
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1479
HA
OK or NG
OK © Check combination meter.
NG © Replace harness or connector.
SC

IDX

EL-237
 LCD DISPLAY
System Description

System Description NJEL0571

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH SYSTEM NJEL0571S01
Refer to Owner′s Manual for multifunction switch operating instruc-
tions.
Using the multifunction switch at the center of the instrument panel,
the controls of the following systems are centralized:
I Auto A/C system
I Vehicle information system
I Audio system
I Navigation system
PRECAUTION OF LCD MONITOR NJEL0571S02
I When passenger compartment temperature is low, the LCD
monitor sometimes dims because of the brightness of the back
light (small fluorescent light) integrated into the LCD monitor
decrease. In this case, the refreshing rate of the picture also
becomes low because of the low response of the LCD moni-
tor. When passenger compartment becomes warm, however,
the LCD recovers the normal display.
I Sometimes, black or bright dots peculiar to LCD monitor can
be seen on the display.
I Back light sometimes flickers or darkens according to the total
consumption hours and the number of ON and OFF switching.
In this case, the back light should be replaced (display unit
assembly).
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NJEL0571S03
Power is Supplied at All Times NJEL0571S0301
I through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to display unit terminals 21 and 23
I to audio unit terminals 3 and 4.
When Ignition Switch is in ACC or ON Position, Power
is Supplied NJEL0571S0302
I through 10A fuse [No. 1, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to display unit terminal 19,
I to multifunction switch terminal 6 and
I to audio unit terminal 2.
When Ignition Switch is in ON or START Position,
Power is Supplied NJEL0571S0303
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to display unit terminal 27.
Ground is Supplied NJEL0571S0304
I to multifunction switch terminal 1 and
I to display unit terminals 22 and 24
I through body grounds M28, M67 and F118 (QG engine mod-
els).
AV COMMUNICATION LINE NJEL0571S04
Display unit is controlled by the following unit with AV communica-
tion line.
I Multifunction switch
I Audio unit
I AV and NAVI control unit

EL-238
 LCD DISPLAY
System Description (Cont’d)
VEHICLE INFORMATION SYSTEM NJEL0571S05
Refer to Owner′s Manual for vehicle information system operating
instructions. GI
Vehicle information system is monitoring to drive information, fuel
economy information and maintenance information.
MA

EM

LC
1. Press “INFO” switch to display vehicle information display.
2. Select “Drive”, “Fuel Economy” or “Maintenance”.
EC

FE

CL

YEL827D
MT

Display items Display/Setting contents

AT
Elapsed Time Displays driving time with a range of 0000:00:00 to 9999:59:59.

Driving Distance (km) Displays driving distance with a range of 00000.0 to 99999.9.
Drive AX
Average speed
Displays average speed with a range of 000.0 to 999.9.
(km/h)
SU
Average Fuel Displays fuel economy with ignition switch ON, average fuel
Economy (/100 km) economy each 30 minutes.

Distance to Empty BR
Displays possible driving distance with remaining fuel.
(km)
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy (/100 ST
Displays fuel economy each approx. 100 ms.
km)

Fuel Economy
Displays Average Fuel Consumption History. RS
Record (/100 km)

Engine oil Maintenance intervals of engine oil and setting of oil change cycle

Maintenance intervals of oil filter and setting of filter replacement BT

Maintenance Oil Filter
cycle
(with Maintenance information*)
Custom 1 Determines when maintenance intervals are needed. HA
Custom 2 Determines when maintenance intervals are needed.

*: Maintenance information displays the change cycle of engine oil, oil filter, custom 1 and custom 2 on LCD monitor depending on the SC
driving distance specified by a driver or a technician.

IDX

EL-239
 LCD DISPLAY
System Description (Cont’d)
Drive Information NJEL0571S0501
1. Select “Drive”.
2. Elapsed time, driving distance and average speed are dis-
played as drive information. When pushing “ENTER”, elapsed
time, driving distance and average speed are all reset.

MKIB0144E

Fuel Economy Information NJEL0571S0502

1. Select “Fuel Economy”.
2. Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty, Fuel Economy are
displayed as Fuel Economy information.

MKIB0145E

3. Select “Fuel Economy Record”. The average fuel consumption

history will be displayed in graph along with the average for the
previous Reset – to – Reset period.

SKIA0772E

Maintenance Information NJEL0571S0503

1. Select “Maintenance”.
2. Engine Oil, Oil Filter, Custom 1 and Custom 2 are displayed as
maintenance information.

MKIB0146E

WARNING INDICATIONS NJEL0571S06

When combination meter receives warning signal from some con-
trol units or sensors, then combination meter warning lamp is illu-
minated.
Then combination meter sends warning signal to display unit warn-
ing indications on the screen.

EL-240
 LCD DISPLAY
System Description (Cont’d)

Warning lamps in
Warning indicators Warning detection and cancel conditions Cases of malfunction
instrument panel
GI
Warning lamp ON signal is
Detection condition
detected while engine is running.
ENGINE ENGINE ECM malfunction
Warning lamp OFF signal is MA
Cancel condition
detected.

Warning lamp ON signal is EM

Detection condition detected for at least approx. 5
ENGINE OIL PRES- Engine oil seconds while engine is running. Engine oil pressure
SURE pressure decreases.
Warning lamp OFF signal is LC
Cancel condition
detected.

Warning lamp ON signal is EC

detected for at least approx. 10
Detection condition
seconds after ignition switch is SRS air bag system mal-
AIR BAG Air bag turned ON. function FE
Warning lamp OFF signal is
Cancel condition
detected.
CL
Warning lamp ON signal (fluid
Detection condition
level) is detected.
LOW BRAKE FLUID Brake Low brake fluid level
Warning lamp OFF signal is MT
Cancel condition
detected.

Engine coolant temperature as AT

Detection condition
being approx. 119°C (246°F) min.
Engine cooling system
OVERHEATING – Engine coolant temperature as malfunction
Cancel condition being approx. 105°C (221°F) AX
max.

Warning lamp ON signal is SU

Detection condition detected while engine is running.
Charging system malfunction Charging system mal-
CHARGE Charge
function
Cancel condition
Warning lamp OFF signal is BR
detected.

Washer liquid level falls below

Detection condition
approx. 0.8  (1-3/8 Imp pt)
ST
LOW WASHER FLUID – Low washer liquid level
Cancel condition Except above condition.
RS
After warning lamp ON signal is
detected, vehicle is driven for
Detection condition over specified distance. [Fuel
level: Approx. 9.6  (8-1/2 Imp
BT
LOW FUEL Fuel level Low fuel level
pt)]

Cancel condition
Warning lamp OFF signal is HA
detected.

Parking brake ON signal is

detected while vehicle is running
SC
Detection condition
[approx. 5 km/h (3 MPH) or Parking brake remains
PARKING BRAKE Brake faster]. engaged.
Vehicle is stopped, or parking
Cancel condition
brake OFF signal is detected.
IDX

EL-241
 LCD DISPLAY
System Description (Cont’d)

Warning lamps in
Warning indicators Warning detection and cancel conditions Cases of malfunction
instrument panel

Vehicle is running [approx. 5

km/h (3 MPH) or faster] and door
Detection condition
ajar of any of the doors is
DOOR OPEN Door detected. Door is open

Vehicle is stopped and all the

Cancel condition
doors lock.

Warning lamp ON signal is

Detection condition
detected when engine is running. ABS control system mal-
ABS ABS
Warning lamp OFF signal is function
Cancel condition
detected.

Warning lamp ON signal is

Detection condition
ESP ELECTRONIC detected when engine is running.
ESP ESP system malfunction
CONTROL SYSTEM Warning lamp OFF signal is
Cancel condition
detected.

Warning lamp ON signal is

Detection condition detected after ignition switch is
CVT ELECTRONIC turned ON.
CVT TCM system malfunction
CONTROL SYSTEM
Warning lamp OFF signal is
Cancel condition
detected.

Warning lamp ON signal is

Detection condition detected after ignition switch is
CRUISE CONTROL turned ON.
CRUISE ICC system malfunction
SYSTEM
Warning lamp OFF signal is
Cancel condition
detected.

Precautions for Display Unit Replacement NJEL0572

I Record the following memorized contents before replacing the control unit.
<FM·AM>
I Preset frequency
I Area for indicating station, selection of overlapped stations
<CD>
I Program status
<Sound quality>
I Volume balance memory set values
I Equalizer memory set values
<Image quality>
I Brightness of light when ON/OFF
I Dimming switching
I Display color switching
I Replace the display unit after disconnecting both battery cables.
Component Parts and Harness Connector and
Harness Connector Location NJEL0573
For details, refer to “ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION” (EL-543) and “HARNESS LAYOUT” (EL-550).

EL-242
 LCD DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram — COMM —

Wiring Diagram — COMM — NJEL0574

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL738D

EL-243
 LCD DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram — COMM — (Cont’d)

YEL739D

EL-244
 LCD DISPLAY
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit

Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit NJEL0575

Refer to EL-162.
GI

MA

EM

LC
Terminals and Reference Value for AV and
NAVI Control Unit NJEL0576
EC
Refer to EL-450.

FE

CL

MT
Terminals and Reference Value for
Multifunction Switch AT
NJEL0577
Refer to EL-456.
AX

SU

BR

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0578 ST

Refer to EL-457, “Self-Diagnosis Function”.

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-245
 TELEPHONE (PRE WIRE)
Wiring Diagram — PHONE —

Wiring Diagram — PHONE — NJEL0579

YEL740D

EL-246
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT —

Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT — NJEL0471

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL741D

EL-247
 HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — H/SEAT — (Cont’d)

YEL742D

EL-248
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —

Wiring Diagram — SROOF — NJEL0089

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL787D

EL-249
 POWER SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0225

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. 10A fuse, 30A fusible link and 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block
using any switch. M4 circuit breaker (J/B)], 30A fusible link (letter B, located in fuse and
2. Sunroof motor ground circuit fusible link box) and M4 circuit breaker. Verify bat-
3. Sunroof switch tery positive voltage is present at terminal 5 of sun-
4. Sunroof switch circuit roof motor. And then turn ignition switch “ON” and
5. Sunroof motor verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
2 of sunroof switch.
2. Check sunroof motor ground circuit.
3. Check sunroof switch.
4. Check harness between sunroof switch and sunroof
motor.
5. Check sunroof motor.

Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. Sunroof switch 1. Check sunroof switch.

using one of the sunroof switches. 2. Sunroof switch circuit 2. Check the harness between sunroof motor and sun-
roof switch.

EL-250
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —

Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — NJEL0472

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL788D

EL-251
 DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — (Cont’d)

YEL743D

EL-252
 POWER WINDOW
System Description

System Description =NJEL0498

Power is supplied at all times
I from 30A fusible link (letter B, located in the fuse and fusible link box) GI
I to circuit breaker terminal 1
I through circuit breaker terminal 2 MA
I to power window relay terminal 5
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
EM
I to power window relay terminal 1
Ground is supplied to power window relay terminal 2 LC
I through body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67.
The power window relay is energized and power is supplied
EC
I through power window relay terminal 3
I to power window main switch terminal 1,
I to front power window sub-switch terminal 5, FE
I to rear power window sub-switch LH and RH terminals 5 (models with rear power window).
MANUAL OPERATION NJEL0498S01
CL
Front Door (Driver Side) NJEL0498S0101
Ground is supplied
MT
I to power window main switch terminal 3
I through body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67.
WINDOW UP AT
When the driver’s window switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position, power is
supplied
I through power window main switch terminal 9 AX
I to driver side power window regulator terminal 2.
Ground is supplied SU
I through power window main switch terminal 1
I to driver side power window regulator terminal 8.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
BR
WINDOW DOWN
When the driver’s window switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position, power is ST
supplied
I through power window main switch terminal 8
I to driver side power window regulator terminal 1. RS
Ground is supplied
I to driver side power window regulator terminal 2
BT
I through power window main switch terminal 9.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front Door (Passenger Side)
HA
NJEL0498S0102
Ground is supplied
I to power window main switch terminal 3 SC
I through body grounds F118 (QG engine models), M28 and M67.
NOTE:
Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when power window switch is pressed in the UP and DOWN
positions respectively.
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION IDX
Power is supplied
I through power window main switch (5, 6)
I to front power window sub-switch (3, 4).

EL-253
 POWER WINDOW
System Description (Cont’d)
The subsequent operation is the same as the front power window sub-switch operation.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SUB-SWITCH OPERATION
Power is supplied
I through front power window sub-switch (1, 2)
I to front passenger side power window regulator (1, 2).
Ground is supplied
I to front passenger side power window regulator (2, 1)
I through front power window sub-switch (2, 1)
I to front power window sub-switch (4, 3)
I through power window main switch (6, 5).
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
Rear Door NJEL0498S0103
Rear door windows will raise and lower in the same manner as passenger’s door window.
POWER WINDOW LOCK NJEL0498S02
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver’s door window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the sub-switches in the power window main switch
is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating.
AUTO OPERATION NJEL0498S03
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open the driver’s window without holding the window
switch in the down position.
The AUTO feature operates on the driver’s window.

EL-254
POWER WINDOW
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0499

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

MEL916L

EL-255
 POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —

Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — NJEL0500

YEL744D

EL-256
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL745D

EL-257
 POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

YEL746D

EL-258
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL747D

EL-259
 POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0501

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

None of the power windows can be 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
operated using any switch. 2. 30A fusible link, M4 circuit Turn ignition switch “ON” and verify positive battery
breaker voltage is present at terminal 1 of power window
3. Power window relay relay.
4. Ground circuit 2. Check 30A fusible link (letter B, located in fuse and
5. Power window main switch fusible link box) and M4 circuit breaker. Verify posi-
tive battery voltage is present at terminal 5 of power
window relay.
3. Check power window relay.
4. Check the following:
a. Check ground circuit of power window main switch.
b. Check power window relay ground circuit.
5. Check power window main switch.

Driver side power window cannot 1. Driver side power window regu- 1. Check harness between power window main switch
be operated but other windows can lator circuit and driver side power window regulator for open or
be operated. 2. Driver side power window regu- short circuit.
lator 2. Check driver side power window regulator.
3. Power window main switch 3. Check power window main switch.

One or more power windows 1. Power window sub-switches 1. Check power window sub-switch.
except driver’s side window cannot 2. Power window regulators 2. Check power window regulator.
be operated. 3. Power window main switch 3. Check power window main switch.
4. Power window circuit 4. Check the following.
a. Check harness between the power window relay
terminal 3 and power window sub-switch terminal 5.
b. Check harnesses between power window main
switch and power window sub-switch for open/short
circuit.
c. Check harnesses between power window sub-switch
and power window regulator for open/short circuit.

Power windows except driver’s 1. Power window main switch 1. Check power window main switch.
side window cannot be operated
using power window main switch
but can be operated by power win-
dow sub-switch.

Driver side power window auto- 1. Power window main switch 1. Check power window main switch.
matic operation does not function
properly.

EL-260
 POWER DOOR LOCK
System Description

System Description =NJEL0502

OPERATION
Power door lock/unlock operation by door key cylinder
NJEL0502S02
GI
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors. MA
Power door lock/unlock operation by multi-remote controller (If equipped)
I Pressing multi-remote controller LOCK button will lock all doors.
EM
I Pressing multi-remote controller UNLOCK button once will unlock driver door. Then, if an unlock signal is
sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be unlocked.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch LC
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to LOCK will lock all doors.
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-261
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0503

YEL748D

EL-262
POWER DOOR LOCK
Schematic (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL749D

EL-263
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —

Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — NJEL0504

FIG. 1 NJEL0504S01

YEL750D

EL-264
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0504S02

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL751D

EL-265
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NJEL0504S03

YEL752D

EL-266
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4 NJEL0504S04

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL753D

EL-267
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 5 NJEL0504S05

YEL754D

EL-268
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 6 NJEL0504S06

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL755D

EL-269
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 7 NJEL0504S07

YEL756D

EL-270
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NJEL0580
GI
NJEL0580S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector. MA

EM

SIIA1645E LC
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC

FE

CL

MBIB0233E
MT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SIIA1678E

6. Touch “DOOR LOCKING” or “TRUNK RELEASE”.

ST

RS

BT

HA
SIIA1676E

7. Select diagnosis mode. SC

“DATA MONITOR” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available.

IDX

SIIA1677E

EL-271
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS NJEL0580S02
Door Locking NJEL0580S0201
DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item Description

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY IN DETECT Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.

DOOR SW DR RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (driver side).

DOOR SW AS RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (passenger side).

AS DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).

DR DOOR SW Indicates [ON\OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).

CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/ unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/ unlock switch.

RKE LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.

RKE UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.

RKE SEL UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of select unlock signal from remote controller.

WORK SUPPORT
Monitored Item Description

Auto re-lock function can be changed in this mode. The re-lock mode will be changed when
AUTO RE-LOCK
“CHANGE MODE” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

Selective unlock function can be changed in this mode. The unlock mode will be changed when
SELECTIVE UNLOCK
“CHANGE SET” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

Trunk Release NJEL0580S0202

DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item Description

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

TRUNK OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch (sedan) or back door switch (wagon).

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of internal trunk release switch (sedan) or internal back door
INT TRUNK REL
release switch (wagon).

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of external trunk release switch (sedan) or external back door
EXT TRUNK REL
release switch (wagon).

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk (sedan) or back door (back door) open signal from trunk
RKE TRUNK REL
or back door release switch.

WORK SUPPORT
Monitored Item Description

This mode can be changed trunk release switch (sedan) or back door (wagon) release switch
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
operation time.

EL-272
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART =NJEL0580S03
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SMART ENTRANCE”
with CONSULT-II, when perform the each trouble diagnosis. Refer GI
to EL-271, “CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.

Symptom Malfunctioning system

Reference MA
page

Power supply and ground circuit check EL-274

EM
Door lock actuator check EL-277
Power door lock does not operate using any switch
If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance con-
trol unit.
— LC
Door lock/unlock switch check EL-275
Power door lock does not operate with lock/unlock
If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control
EC
switch. —
unit.

Specific door lock actuator does not operate. Door lock actuator check EL-277 FE
Door switch check EL-283

Key switch check EL-291 CL

*Key reminder system does not operate.
If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control
—
unit. MT
Trunk room lamp switch or back door switch check —

Trunk release actuator check (sedan) — AT

Trunk or back door release actuator does not operate. Back door release actuator check (hatchback) —

If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control

—
AX
unit.

*: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-273
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0580S04

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 49 (W/L), 56 (R/B) and ground.

SIIA1564E

MTBL1480

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check smart entrance control unit power supply circuit for open or short.

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 53 (B) and ground.

SIIA1565E

MTBL1481

OK or NG
OK © Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG © Check smart entrance control unit ground circuit for open or short.

EL-274
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK NJEL0580S05

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door lock/unlock switch input signal (“CDL LOCK SW” “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. MA

EM

LC

EC

SIIA1566E FE
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK:
CDL LOCK SW ⇒ ON
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK: CL
CDL UNLOCK SW ⇒ ON

Without CONSULT-II MT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 13 (P), 14 (L) and ground.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SIIA1567E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1482

OK or NG HA
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-275
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals.
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch) (With power window system)

YEL803C
I Door lock/unlock switch (Without power window system)

SEL469X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control
unit connector
NG © Replace power window main switch (door lock/unlock switch).

EL-276
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0580S06
Driver Side NJEL0580S0601
GI
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL
1. Disconnect door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector.
2. Check voltage between door lock actuator harness connector D27 terminal 1 (L), 3 (W/R) and ground. MA

EM

LC

EC

YEL834D FE

CL

MT
MTBL1484

OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3. AX

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

SU
1. Disconnect door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
BR

ST

RS

BT
YEL835D
HA

SC

MTBL1485

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. IDX
NG © Replace door lock actuator (driver side).

EL-277
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector D27 terminal 1 (L), 3 (W/R) and smart
entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 51 (L/R), 52 (W/R).

YEL836D

MTBL1486

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door lock
actuator (driver side).

Passenger Side NJEL0580S0602

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL

1. Disconnect door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector.
2. Check voltage between door lock actuator harness connector D48 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and ground.

YEL834D

MTBL1487

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-278
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector. GI
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.

MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL835D

FE

CL
MTBL1488

OK or NG MT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace door lock actuator (passenger side). AT

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT AX

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector D48 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and
smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 52 (W/R), 54 (R/B). SU

BR

ST

RS

YEL837D BT

HA

SC

MTBL1489

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit. IDX
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door lock
actuator (passenger side).

EL-279
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Rear LH Side NJEL0580S0603

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL

1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
2. Check voltage between door lock actuator harness connector D62 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and ground.

YEL834D

MTBL1490

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to rear door lock actuator LH and check operation.

YEL835D

MTBL1491

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace rear door lock actuator LH.

EL-280
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. GI
2. Check continuity between rear door lock actuator LH harness connector D62 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and smart
entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 52 (W/R), 54 (R/B).
MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL837D

FE

CL

MT
MTBL1492

OK or NG AT
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door lock
actuator LH.
AX

Rear RH Side NJEL0580S0604 SU

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL
1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH harness connector. BR
2. Check voltage between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector D82 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and ground.

ST

RS

BT

HA
YEL834D

SC

MTBL1493

OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-281
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to rear door lock actuator RH and check operation.

YEL835D

MTBL1494

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace rear door lock actuator RH.

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector D82 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and smart
entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 52 (W/R), 54 (R/B).

YEL837D

MTBL1495

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door lock
actuator RH.

EL-282
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK NJEL0580S07
Driver Side NJEL0580S0701
GI
1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “DR DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

EM

LC

EC

SIIA1590E FE

CL

MTBL1496 MT

Without CONSULT-II AT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and ground.
AX

SU

BR

ST
SIIA1588E

RS

BT

MTBL1497 HA
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK. SC
NG © GO TO 2.

IDX

EL-283
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between front door switch LH harness connector B8 terminals 2 and 3.

SEL325WA

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Front door switch LH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
LH
NG © Replace front door switch LH.

EL-284
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Passenger Side NJEL0580S0702

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “AS DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1591E
FE

CL
MTBL1499
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 44 (R/W) and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SIIA1592E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1500

OK or NG HA
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-285
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between front door switch RH harness connector B19 terminal 1 (R/W) and ground.

SIIA1589E

MTBL1501

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Front door switch RH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
RH
NG © Replace front door switch RH.

EL-286
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Rear LH Side NJEL0580S0703

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “RR LH DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1593E
FE

CL
MTBL1502
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 39 (BR/W) and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SIIA1597E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1503

OK or NG HA
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-287
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between rear door switch LH harness connector B24 terminal 1 (BR/W) and ground.

SIIA1595E

MTBL1504

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear door switch LH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door switch
LH
NG © Replace rear door switch LH.

EL-288
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Rear RH Side NJEL0580S0704

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “RR RH DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1596E
FE

CL
MTBL1505
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 45 (R/Y) and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SIIA1594E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1506

OK or NG HA
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-289
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between rear door switch RH harness connector B35 terminal 1 (R/Y) and ground.

SIIA1595E

MTBL1507

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear door switch RH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door switch
RH
NG © Replace rear door switch RH.

EL-290
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH CHECK NJEL0580S08

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check key switch input signal “KEY IN DETECT” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1598E
When key is inserted in ignition key cylinder: FE
KEY IN DETECT ⇒ ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY IN DETECT ⇒ OFF CL
Without CONSULT-II
I Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 5 (L/W) and ground. MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA
SIIA1599E

SC

MTBL1508

OK or NG IDX
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-291
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

1. Disconnect key switch connector.
2. Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.

YEL791C

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models NJEL0505
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0505S02

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 293 294 295 296 298 299 300
Main power supply and ground circuit check

Door key cylinder switch check

Door lock/unlock switch check

Door unlock sensor check

Door lock actuator check

Door switch check

Key switch check

SYMPTOM

Power door lock does not operate using any

1 X X
switch.

Power door lock does not operate with lock/

2 X
unlock switch.

Power door lock does not operate with door key

3 X
cylinder switch.

4 Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X

5 *Key reminder system does not operate. X X X

X: Applicable
*: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.

EL-292
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0505S03
Main Power Supply Circuit Check NJEL0505S0301
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEL467X
EC
Ground Circuit Check NJEL0505S0302

FE

CL

MT

AT
SEL448X

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-293
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0505S04

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Disconnect time control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between time control unit harness connector terminal 37 or 38 and ground.

SEL468X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-266.
OK or NG
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals.
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch) (With power window)

YEL801C
I Door lock/unlock switch (Without power window)

SEL469X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and time control unit con-
nector
NG © Replace door lock/unlock switch.

EL-294
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK NJEL0505S05

1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL) GI

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminals 28 or 29 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL470X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-267.
OK or NG FE
OK © Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL

2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH MT

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL471X

OK or NG
ST
OK © Check the following.
I Door key cylinder switch ground circuit RS
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door key cylinder switch
NG © Replace door key cylinder switch.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-295
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0505S06

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage for door lock actuator.
I Door lock actuator driver’s side

YEL839D
I Door lock actuator passenger side and rear

SEL473X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-269.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the control unit, perform “DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)

EL-296
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector. GI
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
I Front and rear door
MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL840D
I Back door FE

CL

MT

AT

SEL491X
AX
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between time control unit connector and door lock
actuator. SU
NG © Replace door lock actuator.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-297
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0505S08

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 6 and ground.

SEL475X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-265.
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminals.

SEL325WA

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG © Replace door switch.

EL-298
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK =NJEL0505S09

1 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL GI

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 35 or 36 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL476X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-268.
OK or NG FE
OK © Door unlock sensor is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL

2 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR MT

1. Disconnect door unlock sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals 2 and 4.
AT

AX

SU

BR
YEL847D
ST
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit RS
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door unlock sensor
NG © Replace door unlock sensor.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-299
 POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models with Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NJEL0505S11

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 22 and ground.

SEL433X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-306.
OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.

YEL802C

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

EL-300
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
System Description

System Description NJEL0395

OUTLINE NJEL0395S01
Power door lock system with super lock and key reminder is controlled by time control unit. Super lock has a
GI
higher anti-theft performance than conventional power door lock systems.
When super lock is in released condition, lock knob operation locks or unlocks door. MA
When super lock is in set condition, lock knob operation cannot lock nor unlock door.

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

SEL831U BR

OPERATION
Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by door key cylinder
NJEL0395S02
ST
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors and set super lock.
(Super lock will not be set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.) RS
I With the key inserted into front door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors and release
super lock.
Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by multi-remote controller (If equipped) BT
I Pressing multi-remote controller LOCK button will lock all doors and set super lock. (Super lock will not be
set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.)
HA
I Pressing multi-remote controller UNLOCK button once will unlock driver door and release super lock. Then,
if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked. SC
Power door lock and super lock release operation (by NATS IMMU signal)
I When the super lock is set, turning the ignition key switch to ON will release the super lock. All doors will
unlock once, but then immediately lock again.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to LOCK will lock all doors. IDX
I With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Lock/unlock switch operation cannot control super lock.
Key reminder system
I If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, setting lock/unlock switch, lock

EL-301
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
System Description (Cont’d)
knob, key or multi-remote controller to “LOCK” locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors.
(signal from door unlock sensor driver side)
System initialization
I System initialization is required when battery cables are reconnected. Conduct the following to release
super lock once;
— insert the key into the ignition key cylinder and turn it to ON.
— LOCK/UNLOCK operation using door key cylinder or multi-remote controller.

EL-302
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
System Description (Cont’d)
NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-303
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0475

YEL757D

EL-304
POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Schematic (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL758D

EL-305
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK —

Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — NJEL0476

FIG. 1 NJEL0476S01

YEL759D

EL-306
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NJEL0476S03

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL760D

EL-307
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4 NJEL0476S04

YEL761D

EL-308
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 5 NJEL0476S05

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL762D

EL-309
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 6 NJEL0476S06

YEL763D

EL-310
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 7 NJEL0476S07

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL764D

EL-311
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Wiring Diagram — S/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 8 NJEL0476S10

YEL707C

EL-312
POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NJEL0581
GI
NJEL0581S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector. MA

EM

SIIA1645E LC
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC

FE

CL

MBIB0233E
MT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SIIA1678E

6. Touch “DOOR LOCK” or “TRUNK RELEASE”.

ST

RS

BT

HA
SIIA1676E

7. Select diagnosis mode. SC

“DATA MONITOR” and “WORK SUPPROT” are available.

IDX

SIIA1677E

EL-313
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS NJEL0581S02
Door Locking NJEL0581S0201
DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item Description

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY IN DETECT Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.

DOOR SW DR RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (driver side).

DOOR SW AS RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (passenger side).

AS DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).

DR DOOR SW Indicates [ON\OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).

CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/ unlock switch.

CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/ unlock switch.

RKE LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.

RKE UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.

RKE SEL UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of select unlock signal from remote controller.

WORK SUPPORT
Monitored Item Description

Auto re-lock function can be changed in this mode. The re-lock mode will be changed when
AUTO RE-LOCK
“CHANGE MODE” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

Selective unlock function can be changed in this mode. The unlock mode will be changed when
SELECTIVE UNLOCK
“CHANGE SET” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

Trunk Release NJEL0581S0202

DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item Description

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

TRUNK OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch (sedan) or back door switch (wagon).

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of internal trunk release switch (sedan) or internal back door
INT TRUNK REL
release switch (wagon).

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of external trunk release switch (sedan) or external back door
EXT TRUNK REL
release switch (wagon).

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk (sedan) or back door (back door) open signal from trunk
RKE TRUNK REL
or back door release switch.

WORK SUPPORT
Monitored Item Description

This mode can be changed trunk release switch (sedan) or back door (wagon) release switch
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
operation time.

EL-314
POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
PRELIMINARY CHECK =NJEL0581S03
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SMART ENTRANCE”
with CONSULT-II, when perform the each trouble diagnosis. Refer GI
to EL-313, “CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SIIA1601E
SC
After performing preliminary check, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary
check.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of
Preliminary check. IDX

EL-315
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0581S04

Reference
Symptom Malfunctioning system
page

Power supply and ground circuit check EL-317

SYMPTOM 1 Door lock actuator check EL-321

Power door lock does not operate using any switch
If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance con-
—
trol unit.

SYMPTOM 2 Door lock/unlock switch check EL-319

Power door lock does not operate with lock/unlock If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control
switch. —
unit.

Door lock actuator check EL-321

SYMPTOM 3
Specific door lock actuator does not operate. If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control
—
unit.

Super lock actuator check EL-336

Key switch check EL-335

SYMPTOM 4
Super lock cannot be set by door key cylinder. Ignition switch ON circuit check EL-318

If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance con-

—
trol unit.

Super lock actuator check EL-336

SYMPTOM 5
*Super lock cannot be released by door key cylinder. If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance con-
—
trol unit.

Super lock actuator check EL-336

SYMPTOM 6 Ignition switch “ON” circuit check EL-318

*Super lock cannot be released by ignition key switch.
If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance con-
—
trol unit.

Super lock actuator check EL-336

SYMPTOM 7
Specific super lock actuator does not operate. If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control
—
unit.

Door switch check EL-327

Trunk room lamp switch or back door switch check —

SYMPTOM 8
*Key reminder system does not operate. Key switch check EL-335

If above system is OK, replace smart entrance control

—
unit.

*: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.

EL-316
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0581S05

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT GI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 49 (W/L), 56 (R/B) and ground. MA

EM

LC

EC

SIIA1564E FE

CL

MT
MTBL1480

OK or NG
AT
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check smart entrance control unit power supply circuit for open or short.
AX
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 53 (B) and ground.
SU

BR

ST

RS

SIIA1565E
BT

HA

MTBL1481
SC
OK or NG
OK © Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG © Check smart entrance control unit ground circuit for open or short.
IDX

EL-317
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
IGNITION SWITCH “ON” CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0581S11

1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 29 (Y/G) and ground.

SIIA1602E

MTBL1553

OK or NG
OK © Ignition ON signal is OK.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

EL-318
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK NJEL0581S06

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door lock/unlock switch input signal (“CDL LOCK SW” “CDL UNLOCK SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II. MA

EM

LC

EC

SIIA1566E FE
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to LOCK:
CDL LOCK SW ⇒ ON
When door lock/unlock switch is turned to UNLOCK: CL
CDL UNLOCK SW ⇒ ON

Without CONSULT-II MT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 13 (P), 14 (L) and ground.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SIIA1567E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1482

OK or NG HA
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-319
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals.
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch) (With power window system)

YEL803C
I Door lock/unlock switch (Without power window system)

SEL469X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control
unit connector
NG © Replace power window main switch (door lock/unlock switch).

EL-320
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0581S07
Driver Side NJEL0581S0701
GI
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL
1. Disconnect door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector.
2. Check voltage between door lock actuator harness connector D27 terminal 1 (L), 3 (W/R) and ground. MA

EM

LC

EC

YEL834D FE

CL

MT
MTBL1484

OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3. AX

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

SU
1. Disconnect door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
BR

ST

RS

BT
YEL835D
HA

SC

MTBL1485

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. IDX
NG © Replace door lock actuator (driver side).

EL-321
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector D27 terminal 1 (L), 3 (W/R) and smart
entrance control unit harness connector M43 terminal 51 (L/R), 52 (W/R).

YEL836D

MTBL1486

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door lock
actuator (driver side).

Passenger Side NJEL0581S0702

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL

1. Disconnect door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector.
2. Check voltage between door lock actuator harness connector D48 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and ground.

YEL834D

MTBL1487

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-322
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector. GI
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.

MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL835D

FE

CL
MTBL1488

OK or NG MT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace door lock actuator (passenger side). AT

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT AX

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector D48 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and
smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 52 (W/R), 54 (R/B). SU

BR

ST

RS

YEL837D BT

HA

SC

MTBL1489

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit. IDX
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door lock
actuator (passenger side).

EL-323
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Rear LH Side NJEL0581S0703

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL

1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
2. Check voltage between door lock actuator harness connector D62 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and ground.

YEL834D

MTBL1490

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to rear door lock actuator LH and check operation.

YEL835D

MTBL1491

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace rear door lock actuator LH.

EL-324
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. GI
2. Check continuity between rear door lock actuator LH harness connector D62 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and smart
entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 52 (W/R), 54 (R/B).
MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL837D

FE

CL

MT
MTBL1492

OK or NG AT
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door lock
actuator LH.
AX

Rear RH Side NJEL0581S0704 SU

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL
1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH harness connector. BR
2. Check voltage between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector D82 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and ground.

ST

RS

BT

HA
YEL834D

SC

MTBL1493

OK or NG IDX
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © GO TO 3.

EL-325
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH harness connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to rear door lock actuator RH and check operation.

YEL835D

MTBL1494

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace rear door lock actuator RH.

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector D82 terminal 1 (R/B), 3 (W/R) and smart
entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 52 (W/R), 54 (R/B).

YEL837D

MTBL1495

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door lock
actuator RH.

EL-326
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK NJEL0581S08
Driver Side NJEL0581S0801
GI
1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “DR DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

EM

LC

EC

SIIA1590E FE

CL

MTBL1496 MT

Without CONSULT-II AT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 43 (R/W) and ground.
AX

SU

BR

ST
SIIA1588E

RS

BT

MTBL1497 HA
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK. SC
NG © GO TO 2.

IDX

EL-327
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between front door switch LH harness connector B8 terminals 2 and 3.

SEL325WA

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Front door switch LH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
LH
NG © Replace front door switch LH.

EL-328
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Passenger Side NJEL0581S0802

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “AS DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1591E
FE

CL
MTBL1499
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 44 (R/W) and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SIIA1592E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1500

OK or NG HA
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-329
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between front door switch RH harness connector B19 terminal 1 (R/W) and ground.

SIIA1589E

MTBL1501

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Front door switch RH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front door switch
RH
NG © Replace front door switch RH.

EL-330
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Rear LH Side NJEL0581S0803

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “RR LH DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1593E
FE

CL
MTBL1502
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 39 (BR/W) and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SIIA1597E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1503

OK or NG HA
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-331
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between rear door switch LH harness connector B24 terminal 1 (BR/W) and ground.

SIIA1595E

MTBL1504

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear door switch LH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door switch
LH
NG © Replace rear door switch LH.

EL-332
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
Rear RH Side NJEL0581S0804

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check door switch “RR RH DOOR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1596E
FE

CL
MTBL1505
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 45 (R/Y) and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SIIA1594E
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1506

OK or NG HA
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. SC

IDX

EL-333
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between rear door switch RH harness connector B35 terminal 1 (R/Y) and ground.

SIIA1595E

MTBL1507

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear door switch RH ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear door switch
RH
NG © Replace rear door switch RH.

EL-334
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH CHECK NJEL0581S09

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
I Check key switch input signal “KEY IN DETECT” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1598E
When key is inserted in ignition key cylinder: FE
KEY IN DETECT ⇒ ON
When key is removed from ignition key cylinder:
KEY IN DETECT ⇒ OFF CL
Without CONSULT-II
I Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminal 5 (L/W) and ground. MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA
SIIA1599E

SC

MTBL1508

OK or NG IDX
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-335
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

1. Disconnect key switch connector.
2. Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.

YEL791C

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0581S10

Front Door NJEL0581S1001

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector F195 terminal 52 (W/R), 55 (W/B) and ground.

SIIA1609E

MTBL1510

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.

EL-336
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector. GI
Door lock actuator connector (Driver side): D14
Door lock actuator connector (Passenger side): D38
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator assembly and check operation. MA

EM

LC

EC

YEL841D
FE

CL

MT
MTBL1511

OK or NG
AT
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and super lock
actuator.
NG © Replace super lock actuator (door lock actuator). AX
Rear Door NJEL0581S1002
SU
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 55 (W/B), 52 (W/R) and ground.
BR

ST

RS

BT
SIIA1609E
HA

SC

MTBL1554

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
IDX
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.

EL-337
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnosis/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector.
Door lock actuator connector (Rear LH side): D55
Door lock actuator connector (Rear RH side): D75
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator assembly and check operation.

YEL841D

MTBL1555

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and super lock
actuator.
NG © Replace super lock actuator (door lock actuator).

EL-338
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models NJEL0477
GI
PRELIMINARY CHECK NJEL0477S01

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
SEL062X

After performing preliminary check, go to SYMPTOM CHART.

Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary check, EL-339.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of Preliminary check.

EL-339
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0477S02

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 341 342 343 344 346 347 348 349 350 351 351

Main power supply and ground circuit check

Ignition switch “ON” circuit check

Door key cylinder switch check

Remote controller signal check

Door lock/unlock switch check

NATS release signal check

Super lock actuator check

Door unlock sensor check

Door lock actuator check

Door switch check

Key switch check

SYMPTOM

Power door lock does not operate

1 X X
using any switch.

Power door lock does not operate

2 X
with lock/unlock switch.

Power door lock does not operate

3 X
with door key cylinder switch.

Specific door lock actuator does

4 X
not operate.

Super lock cannot be set by door

5 X X X X
key cylinder.

*Super lock cannot be released

6 X X
by door key cylinder.

*Super lock cannot be released

7 by ignition key switch. (Signal X X X
from NATS IMMU)

Specific super lock actuator does

8 X
not operate.

*Key reminder system does not

9 X X X
operate.

Super lock cannot be set/released

10 X X
by using multi-remote controller.

X: Applicable
*: Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.

EL-340
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0477S03
Main Power Supply Circuit Check NJEL0477S0301
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEL467X
EC
Ground Circuit Check NJEL0477S0302

FE

CL

MT

AT
SEL448X

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-341
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0477S04

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1. Disconnect time control unit harness connector.
2. Check continuity between time control unit harness connector terminal 37 or 38 and ground.

SEL468X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-308.
OK or NG
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals.
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch) (With power window)

YEL803C
I Door lock/unlock switch (Without power window)

SEL469X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and time control unit con-
nector
NG © Replace door lock/unlock switch.

EL-342
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK NJEL0477S05

1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL) GI

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminals 28 or 29 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL470X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-307.
OK or NG FE
OK © Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL

2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH MT

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL471X

OK or NG
ST
OK © Check the following.
I Door key cylinder switch ground circuit RS
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door key cylinder switch
NG © Replace door key cylinder switch.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-343
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK NJEL0477S06

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage for door lock actuator.
I Door lock actuator driver’s side

SEL472X
I Door lock actuator passenger side and rear

SEL473X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-310.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the control unit, perform “DOOR LOCK/
UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)

EL-344
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator harness connector. GI
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation.
I Front and rear door
MA

EM

LC

EC
YEL804C
I Back door (Hatchback)
FE

CL

MT

AT
SEL491X
I Trunk lid (Sedan) AX

SU

BR

ST
YEL805C

OK or NG RS
OK © Check harness for open or short between time control unit connector and door lock
actuator.
BT
NG © Replace door lock actuator.

HA

SC

IDX

EL-345
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK =NJEL0477S07

1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

Check voltage for super lock actuator.

SEL474X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-310.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the unit, perform “DOOR KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH CHECK”.)

2 CHECK SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect door lock actuator assembly connector.
2. Set lever A in lock position.
3. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator assembly and check operation.

YEL806C

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between time control unit and super lock actuator.
NG © Replace super lock actuator.

EL-346
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NJEL0477S08

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminals 6 or 7 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL475X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-309.
OK or NG FE
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2. CL

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH MT

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL325WA

OK or NG
ST
OK © Check the following.
I Door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition RS
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG © Replace door switch.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-347
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR CHECK =NJEL0477S13

1 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 35 or 36 and ground.

SEL476X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-309.
OK or NG
OK © Door unlock sensor is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR

1. Disconnect door unlock sensor connector.
2. Check continuity between door unlock sensor terminals 2 and 5.

SEL477X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door unlock sensor ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and door unlock sensor
NG © Replace door unlock sensor.

EL-348
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
NATS RELEASE SIGNAL CHECK =NJEL0477S09

1 CHECK NATS SIGNAL CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect battery cable (−) terminal.
2. Disconnect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL478X

OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair harness. CL

2 CHECK NATS RELEASE SIGNAL MT

1. Connect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.
2. Connect battery cable (−) terminal.
3. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 26 and ground. AT

AX

SU

BR

SEL479X ST
OK or NG
OK © Replace super lock control unit. RS
NG © Check NATS system.

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-349
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NJEL0477S10

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 22 and ground.

SEL433X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-306.
OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.

YEL802C

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

EL-350
 POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK —
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
IGNITION SWITCH “ON” CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0477S11

1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL GI

Check voltage between time control unit terminal 1 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL429X

OK or NG
FE
OK © Ignition switch “ON” circuit is OK.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)] CL
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse

REMOTE CONTROLLER SIGNAL CHECK NJEL0477S12

MT
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR BY MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER
1. Withdraw key from ignition key cylinder. AT
2. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 40 or 44 and ground.

AX

SU

BR

YEL807C
ST
OK or NG
OK © System is OK. RS
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the unit, make sure the remote controller ID
registration for time control unit and the remote controller battery once again.) BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-351
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description

System Description NJEL0480

FUNCTION NJEL0480S01
Multi-remote control system has the following function.
I Door lock (and set super lock)
I Door unlock (and release super lock)
I Hazard reminder
LOCK OPERATION NJEL0480S02
To lock door by multi-remote controller, the key switch must be at OFF.
When the LOCK signal is input to time control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with time control
unit)
Then time control unit controls to lock doors and set super lock (models with super lock).
UNLOCK OPERATION NJEL0480S03
When the UNLOCK signal is input to time control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with time con-
trol unit)
Time control unit controls to unlock driver’s door and release super lock (models with super lock).
Then, if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked.
HAZARD REMINDER NJEL0480S04
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller, supply power to turn lamps hazard reminder
flashes as follows
I Lock operation: Flash once
I Unlock operation: Flash twice
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER ID CODE ENTRY NJEL0480S05
A maximum of four remote controllers can be entered.
To enter ID code entry, the following signals must be input to the time control unit.
I Ignition switch (ON)
I Signal from remote controller
For detailed procedure, refer to “ID Code Entry Procedure” in EL-364.

EL-352
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — MULTI —

Wiring Diagram — MULTI — NJEL0481

FIG. 1 NJEL0481S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL765D

EL-353
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — MULTI — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NJEL0481S02

YEL766D

EL-354
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
NJEL0582
GI
NJEL0582S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector. MA

EM

SIIA1645E LC
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)”.
EC

FE

CL

MBIB0233E
MT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.
AT

AX

SU

BR
SIIA1678E

6. Touch “KEYLESS ENTRY”.

ST

RS

BT

HA
SIIA1679E

7. Select diagnosis mode. SC

“DATA MONITOR” and “WORK SUPPORT” are available.

IDX

SIIA1677E

EL-355
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS NJEL0582S02
DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item Description

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.

TRUNK OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk room lamp switch (sedan) or back door switch (wagon).

RKE LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.

RKE UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.

RKE SEL UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of select unlock signal from remote controller.

Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk (sedan) or back door (wagon) open signal from trunk or
RKE TRUNK REL
back door release switch.

BATTERY CHECK Indicates [OK/NG] condition of remote controller battery.

WORK SUPPORT
Test Item Description

KEYLESS CHECK It can be checked whether remote controller ID code is registered or not in this mode.

KEYLESS REGISTRATION Remote controller ID code can be registered.

KEYLESS DI FLASH This mode can be setting remote controller function.

SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0582S03

First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SMART ENTRANCE”
with CONSULT-II, when perform the each trounble diagnosis. Refer
to EL-355, “CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
NOTE:
I Always check remote controller battery before replacing
remote controller.
Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure
page

Remote controller battery check EL-357

All function of multi-remote control system do not Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control
EL-358
operate. unit check

.If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance control unit. —

Remote controller battery check EL-357

Key switch check —

The new ID of remote controller cannot be
Door switch check —
entered.
Power supply and ground circuit check EL-358

If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance control unit. —

If the power door lock system does not operate manually,

EL-356
check power door lock system.
Door lock or unlock does not function.
Remote controller battery check EL-357

If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance control unit. —

Remote controller battery check EL-357

Hazard reminder does not activate properly
when pressing lock or unlock button of remote Hazard reminder check EL-359
controller.
If above systems are OK, replace smart entrance control unit. —

EL-356
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY CHECK NJEL0582S04

1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY GI

Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL237W
Voltage: 2.5V - 3.0V
NOTE: FE
Remote controller does not function if battery is not set correctly.
OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace battery. Refer to EL-365, “Remote Controller Battery Replacement”.
MT
2 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II AT
Check remote controller function (“RKE LOCK”, “RKE UNLOCK”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SIIA1643E

RS

BT
MTBL1512
Voltage: 2.5V - 3.0V
HA
OK or NG
OK © Remote controller is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to EL-356, “Symptom
Chart”. SC
NG © Replace remote controller.

IDX

EL-357
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0582S05

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M43 terminal 49 (W/L), 56 (R/B) and ground.

SIIA1564E

MTBL1513

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check smart entrance control unit power supply circuit for open or short.

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M43 terminal 53 (B) and ground.

SIIA1565E

MTBL1514

OK or NG
OK © Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG © Check smart entrance control unit ground circuit for open or short.

EL-358
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK NJEL0582S06

1 CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP GI

Check if hazard warning lamp flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard warning lamp operate?
MA
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check hazard warning lamp circuit.
EM
2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION
Check the following at when push the remote controller switch.
LC
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M43 terminal 63, 64 and ground.
EC

FE

CL

MT
SIIA1644E

AT

AX

MTBL1515 SU
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and hazard switch. BR
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-359
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models =NJEL0482
SYMPTOM CHART NJEL0482S01
NOTE:
Always check remote controller battery before replacing remote
controller.
Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure page
(EL- )

No doors can be locked or unlocked by remote 1. Remote controller battery check 361
control operation.
(Make sure that power door lock operates prop- 2. Power supply and ground circuit for time control unit check 362
erly. If NG, check power door lock.) 3. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 364

The new ID of remote controller cannot be 1. Remote controller battery check 361
entered.
2. Power supply and ground circuit for time control unit check 362

3. Ignition “ON” power supply circuit for time control unit 363

4. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 364

Hazard reminder does not activate properly when 1. Remote controller battery 361
pressing lock or unlock button of remote controller.
2. Hazard reminder check 363

3. Replace remote controller. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 364

EL-360
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY AND FUNCTION
CHECK =NJEL0482S02
GI
1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY
Remove battery (refer to EL-365) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]: MA
2.5 - 3.0
NOTE:
Remote controller does not function if battery is not set correctly. EM

LC

EC

FE

SEL237W CL
OK or NG
OK © Check remote controller battery terminals for corrosion or damage. MT
NG © Replace battery.

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-361
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0482S03
1 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect time control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between time control unit harness connector terminal 9 and ground.

SEL487X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-353.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 15A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT

Check continuity between time control unit harness connector terminal 16 and ground.

SEL448X
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-353.
OK or NG
OK © Power supply and ground circuits are OK.
NG © Check ground harness.

EL-362
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
IGNITION “ON” POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME
CONTROL UNIT =NJEL0482S17
GI
1 CHECK IGNITION “ON” POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR TIME CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnected time control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between time control unit terminal 1 and ground. MA

EM

LC

EC

SEL429X FE
OK or NG
OK © Ignition “ON” power supply circuit is OK. CL
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse. MT
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK NJEL0482S18
AT
1 CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP
Check if hazard warning lamp flashes with hazard switch.
AX
Does hazard warning lamp operate?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check hazard warning lamp circuit.
SU

2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION BR

Check the following at when push the multi-remote control switch.
Check voltage between terminal 11 and ground. ST
Check voltage between terminal 15 and ground.

RS

BT

HA

SEL499X
SC
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
NG © Replace time control unit. (Before replacing the unit, make sure the remote controller ID
registration for time control unit and the remote controller battery once again.) IDX

EL-363
 MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure

ID Code Entry Procedure NJEL0483

SEL497X

EL-364
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Remote Controller Battery Replacement

Remote Controller Battery Replacement NJEL0484

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

SEL241X
AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-365
 THEFT WARNING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — PRWIRE —

Wiring Diagram — PRWIRE — NJEL0638

YEL780D

EL-366
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — PRWIRE — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL781D

EL-367
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Description

Description NJEL0583
The Smart Entrance Control Unit is applied for QG engine models and YD engine models with common rail.
OUTLINE NJEL0583S01
The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
I Warning chime, refer to EL-136, “WARNING CHIME”.
I Rear defogger and door mirror defogger, refer to EL-173, “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER”.
I Power door lock, refer to EL-261, “POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM”.
I Power door lock - Super lock - (RHD models), refer to EL-301, “POWER DOOR LOCK — SUPER LOCK
—”.
I Multi-remote control system, refer to EL-352, “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM”.
I NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft system), refer to EL-386, “NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)”.
I Interior lamp, refer to EL-80, “INTERIOR ROOM LAMP”.
Also, smart entrance control unit has the “sleep/wake-up control” function. Smart entrance control unit puts
itself (the whole smart entrance control unit) to sleep under certain conditions to prevent unnecessary power
consumption. Then, when a certain input is detected, the system wakes itself up. For more detailed
information, refer to EL-368, “SLEEP/WAKE-UP CONTROL”.
INTERIOR LAMP/SPOT LAMP/VANITY MIRROR ILLUMINATION NJEL0583S02
The lamps turn off automatically when the interior lamp, spot lamp or/and vanity mirror illumination are illumi-
nated with the ignition key in the OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the
lamp switch is in the ON position for more than 30 minutes.
After lamps are turned off by the smart entrance control unit, the lamps illuminate again when:
I Driver’s door is locked or unlocked with remote controller, door lock/unlock switch or door key cylinder.
I Ignition switch is turned to ON.
I Door is opened or closed,
I Key is inserted into ignition key cylinder.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER NJEL0583S03
Rear window defogger is turned off in approximately 15 minutes after the rear window defogger switch is turned
on.
SLEEP/WAKE-UP CONTROL NJEL0583S04
Sleep Control NJEL0583S0401
“Sleep” control prevents unnecessary power consumption. After the following conditions are met, the smart
entrance control unit suspends the operation. The whole smart entrance control unit is set in the “sleep” mode.
I Ignition switch “OFF”
I All electrical loads (in the smart entrance control unit) “OFF”
I Timer “OFF”
I Each switch do not input
Wake-up Control NJEL0583S0402
When the smart entrance control unit detects a “wake-up” signal, it wakes up the whole system and starts
operating again. When any one of the following switches are turned ON, the “sleep” mode is canceled:
I Ignition switch
I Hazard switch
I Headlamp switch
I Hood switch
I Trunk room lamp switch (sedan models)
I Back door switch (hatchback or wagon models)
I Each door switch
I Trunk release switch (sedan models)
I Back door release switch (hatchback or wagon models)
I External trunk release switch (sedan models)
I External back door release switch (hatchback or wagon models)

EL-368
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Description (Cont’d)
INPUT/OUTPUT NJEL0583S05

System Input Output GI

Door lock/unlock switch
Key switch (Insert)
Door lock actuators MA
Power door lock Door switches
Trunk or back door release actuator
Trunk or back door release switch
External trunk or back door release switch
EM
Key switch (Insert)
Ignition switch (ON)
Hazard warning lamp
Multi-remote control Door switches
Key fob signal
Door lock actuator LC
Door lock/unlock switch

Key switch (Insert) EC

Ignition switch (ON)
Warning chime (located in smart entrance
Warning chime Lighting switch (1st)
control unit)
Seat belt switch FE
Front door switch LH

Rear window defogger and door mirror Ignition switch (ON)

Rear window defogger relay CL
defogger Rear window defogger switch

Ignition switch (ON)

Door switches MT
Vehicle security horn relay
Hood switch
Siren control unit
Trunk room lamp switch (sedan models)
Theft warning Security indicator (located in combination
Back door switch (hatchback or wagon
models)
meter) AT
Hazard warning lamp
Door lock/unlock switches
Smash sensor
AX
Door switches
Remote controller signal (lock/unlock)
Interior lamp
Door lock/unlock switches (lock/unlock) SU
Key hole illumination
Trunk room lamp switch (sedan models)
Interior room lamp Step lamp
Back door switch (hatchback or wagon
Spot lamp
models)
Ignition switch (ON)
Vanity mirror BR
Key switch (Insert)

ST

RS

BT

HA

CONSULT-II NJEL0584
SC
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION NJEL0584S01

Item (CONSULT-II screen

Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR WORK SUPPORT
terms)

DOOR LOCKING Power door lock X X IDX

DEFOG Rear window defogger X

KEY REMINDER Warning chime X

LIGHT ON REMINDER Warning chime X

EL-369
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

Item (CONSULT-II screen

Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR WORK SUPPORT
terms)

ROOM LAMP Interior room lamps X

THEFT WARNING Theft warning system X X

RETAINED PWR Retained power control X X

KEYLESS ENTRY Multi-remote control system X X

H/L WASH Headlamp washer X

TRUNK RELEASE Trunk or back door release X X

DIRECTION INDICATORS Direction indicator sound X X

SEC-E C/U SEC self-diagnosis X

X: Applicable
For diagnostic item in each control system, refer to the relevant pages for each system.
The description of DATA MONITOR and WORK SUPORT, refer to EL-370, “DATA MONITOR MODE or EL-371, WORK SUPPORT
MODE”.

DATA MONITOR MODE NJEL0584S02

Item (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnosed system

IGNITION SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY IN DETECT Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of electronic key switch.

DOOR SW DR RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (driver side).

DOOR SW AS RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch (passenger side).

AS DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).

DR DOOR SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).

WASH SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of washer switch.

CDL LOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock/unlock switch (lock signal).

CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door lock/unlock switch (unlock signal).

TRUNK OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of

HOOD OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hood switch.

INT TRUNK REL· Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk or back door release switch.

EXT TRUNK REL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of external trunk back door release switch.

HAZARD SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hazard switch.

RH TURN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of turn signal switch.

LH TURN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of turn signal switch.

REAR DEF SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of multifunction switch (defogger switch).

RKE LOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from remote controller.

RKE UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from remote controller.

RKE SEL UNLOCK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of select unlock signal from remote controller.

RKE TRUNK REL Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from remote controller.

BATTERY CHECK Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of remote controller battery.

TAIL LAMP ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.

EL-370
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

Item (CONSULT-II screen terms) Diagnosed system

CAN COMM GI
CAN CIRC 1
Indicates the communication condition of CAN communication line.
CAN CIRC 2 MA
CAN CIRC 3
EM
WORK SUPPORT MODE NJEL0584S03

Mode Description Test item

LC
AUTO RE-LOCK This mode can set auto re-lock function.
DOOR LOCKING
SELECTIVE UNLOCK This mode can set select unlock function. EC
This mode can set trunk or back door open switch
TRUNK RELERASE TRUNK OPEN DELAY
operation time.
FE
KEYLESS REGISTRATION This mode can register remote controller ID.

WORK SUPPORT for This mode can check whether water remote controller
ROOM
KEYLESS CHECK
ID code is registered or not. CL
KEYLESS DI FLASH This mode can set remote controller function.

DIRECTION INDICATORS AUDIBLE TRAILER WARNING This mode can set audible trailer warning function.
MT

SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE NJEL0584S04 AT

Diagnosis item Description Repair order

RH FLASHER (S) BULB BROKEN

RH turn signal lamp system is mal- Check turn signal lamp system. Refer to EL-67, AX
functioning. “TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNINGLAMPS”.

LH turn signal lamp system is malfunc- Check turn signal lamp system. Refer to EL-67,
LH FLASHER (S) BULB BROKEN
tioning. “TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNINGLAMPS”. SU
RH FLASHER CIRCUIT OVER RH turn signal lamp circuit is open or Check turn signal lamp system. Refer to EL-67,
CURRENT shorted. “TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNINGLAMPS”. BR
LH FLASHER CIRCUIT OVER LH turn signal lamp circuit is open or Check turn signal lamp system. Refer to EL-67,
CURRENT shorted. “TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNINGLAMPS”.
ST
CAN communication line is open or Check CAN communication line. Refer to EL-380,
CAN COMM CIRCUIT*
shorted. “CAN Communication Line Check”.

*: If this malfunction is displayed, first perform the trouble diagnosis.

RS

BT

HA

CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEL0584S05

SC
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

IDX

MAIA0009E

EL-371
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”.

MBIB0233E

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SIIA1678E

6. Perform each diagnostic item according, refer to EL-369,

“DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION” or EL-370, “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS MODE”.

SIIA1676E

EL-372
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-373
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0585

YEL769D

EL-374
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Schematic (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL770D

EL-375
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table

Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table NJEL0586

Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition Voltage (Approximate values)
No. color

NATS antenna amp.

1 G — Approx. 5V
(Power supply)

NATS antenna amp.

2 G/OR — —
(Ground)

The needle of analog tester

NATS antenna amp.
3 G/W Moment when key was inserted. swings immediately after insert-
(Signal line)
ing key.

The needle of analog tester

NATS antenna amp.
4 G/Y Moment when key was inserted swings immediately after insert-
(Signal line)
ing key.

5 L/W Key switch Ignition key Removed , Inserted 0V , 12V

8 L CAN communication line — —

9 Y or PU Audio unit Ignition key removed or inserted

MKIB0191E

11 R CAN communication line — —

Flasher sound signal :

12 PU/W Flasher sounder Triggered (0V) 12V , 0V (850µs) , 12V
.Not triggered (12V)

13 P Door lock/unlock switches Neutral , Locks 12V , 0V

14 L Door lock/unlock switches Neutral , Unlocks 12V , 0V

Hood switch:
15 LG Hood switch 0V , 12V
ON (Open) , OFF (Closed)

Trunk room lamp switch

(sedan models) Trunk or back door release switch:
16 G 12V , 0V
Back door switch (hatchback or OFF , ON (Only when pressed)
wagon models)

17 R/G Tail lamp switch Lighting switch: OFF , 1st or 2nd 0V , 12V

18 LG CONSULT-II SCI interface — —

Trunk release switch (sedan

Internal trunk release switch:
models)
19 LG/R Press , Release (Only when 12V , 0V
Back door switch (hatchback
pressed)
and wagon models)

External trunk or back door release

switch:
20 W External trunk release switch 12V , 0V
OFF (Closed) , ON (Only when
pressed)

[Ignition switch “ON”]

Multifunction switch
22 L/Y Multifunction switch: Press , 7V , 0V
(Rear window defogger switch)
Release (Only when pressed)

23 R Lock/unlock switch indicator Lock/unlock switch: Lock , Unlock 12V , 0V

EL-376
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)

Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition Voltage (Approximate values)
No. color
GI
[Head lamp switch 1st or 2nd posi-
Washer switch
24 BR tion] 12V , 0V
(Headlamp washer switch)
Washer switch OFF , ON MA
Combination switch Turn signal switch:
25 G/OR 12V , 0V
(Turn signal switch) Neutral , Left turn position
EM
Combination switch Turn signal switch:
26 L/B 12V , 0V
(Turn signal switch) Neutral , Right turn position

Vehicle security horn relay When theft warning system: LC

27 Y/B 0V , 12V
(RHD models) Armed , Disarmed

When interior lamp is operated using EC

28 R/Y Interior room lamp remote controller (Lamp switch in 12V , 0V
“DOOR” position)

29 Y/G Ignition key switch Ignition key is in “ON” position 12V FE

30 G/R Hazard switch Hazard switch: OFF , ON 12V , 0V

[Ignition switch “ON”]

CL
31 W Rear window defogger relay Rear window defogger switch: 12V , 0V
OFF , ON
MT
[Ignition switch“ ON”]
32 LG/B Cooling fan relay Cooling fan: Operating , Not operat- 0V , 12V
ing AT
[Ignition switch “ON”]
33 LG/R Cooling fan relay Cooling fan: Operating , Not operat- 0V , 12V
ing AX
34 L/Y Security indicator Ignition switch ON , OFF 12V , 0V

Rear door switch SU

39 BR/W Rear door LH or RH: Open , Closed 0V , 12V
(Passenger side)

41 L Air conditioner relay

[Engine is running]
12V , 0V BR
Air conditioner switch: ON , OFF

Front door switch Front door (Driver side):

43 R/W
(Driver side) Open , Closed
12V , 0V ST
Front door switch Front door (Passenger side):
44 R/W 0V , 12V
(Passenger side) Open , Closed RS
Rear door switch
45 R/Y Rear door LH or RH: Open , Closed 0V , 12V
(Driver side)
BT
49 W/L Power source — 12V

Power door super lock actuator Remote controller door lock switch:
50 G
(Rear) Free , Press
0V , 12V HA
Door lock & unlock switch:
51 L/R Driver door lock actuator 0V , 12V
Free , Lock SC
Door lock & unlock switch:
52 W/R Door lock actuators 0V , 12V
Free , Unlock

53 B Ground — 0V

Door lock & unlock switch:

54 R/B Door lock actuators
Free , Unlock
0V , 12V IDX
Power door super lock actuator Remote controller door lock switch:
55 W/B 0V , 12V
(Front) Free , Unlock

56 R/B Power source — 12V

EL-377
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)

Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition Voltage (Approximate values)
No. color

Trunk release actuator (sedan

models) Trunk or back door release switch:
57 G/B 12V , 0V
Back door release actuator OFF , ON (Open)
(hatchback or wagon)

Starter motor (With A/T or Ignition switch: OFF , START posi-

58 B/W 0V , 12V
CVT) tion

Ignition switch: OFF , START posi-

59 B/Y Starter motor (With M/T) 0V , 12V
tion

[Headlamp switch 1st or 2nd position]

62 L/R Headlamp washer motor 12V , 0V
Washer switch: OFF , ON

[When door lock or unlock is oper-

63 G/Y RH turn signal lamp ated using remote controller] 0V , 12V , 0V
Turn signal lamp: OFF , ON , OFF

[When door lock or unlock is oper-

64 G/B LH turn signal lamp ated using remote controller] 0V , 12V , 0V
Turn signal lamp: OFF , ON , OFF

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0587

PRELIMINARY CHECK NJEL0587S01

1 CHECK “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” MODE WITH CONSULT-II

Check smart entrance system trouble diagnosis (SELF-DIAG RESULTS) in “SEC-E CE” mode with CONSULT-II. Refer to
EL-371, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE”.
Can “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode be displayed?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO 3.

2 CHECK DISPLAY ITEM

Check display item in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode.
Is any malfunction indicated in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode?
Yes © GO TO EL-371, “SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE”.
No © Inspection end.

3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Refer to EL-379, “Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check”.
OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Repair or replace harness.

EL-378
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check

Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check NJEL0588

1 CHECK FUSES GI
Check that any of the fuse in smart entrance control unit is blown.

MA

EM
MTBL1459

OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace malfunctioning fuse.
EC

2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK

FE
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.

CL

MT

AT

AX
MKIB0013E
2. Check the following.
SU

BR

ST

RS
MTBL1460

OK or NG BT
OK © GO TO 3.
No © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse. HA

SC

IDX

EL-379
 SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Cont’d)

3 GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M195 terminal 53 (B) and ground.

MKIB0014E

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © Check ground harness.

CAN Communication Line Check NJEL0589

1 CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SEC-E CE” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. The “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” is detected.
Yes or No
Yes © Print out CONSULT-II screen, GO TO 2.
No © INSPECTION END

2 CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNALS

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” in ”SEC-E CE” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Print out the CONSULT-II screen.

SEC898C

© GO TO EL-509, “CAN COMMUNICATION”.

EL-380
 TIME CONTROL UNIT
Description

Description =NJEL0485
The TCU is applied for YD engine models without common rail and K9K engine models.
The TCU has the following functions. GI
INTERIOR LAMP TIMER NJEL0485S01
The interior lamp timer is controlled by the TCU. MA
For further information, refer to “INTERIOR ROOM LAMP” (EL-80).
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME AND LIGHT WARNING CHIME NJEL0485S02 EM
The ignition key and light warning chime are controlled by the TCU.
For further information, refer to “WARNING CHIME” (EL-136).
LC
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER TIMER NJEL0485S03
The rear window defogger and door mirror defogger system are controlled by the TCU.
For further information, refer to “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER” (EL-174). EC
POWER DOOR LOCK (SUPER LOCK) NJEL0485S04
The power door lock (super lock) is controlled by the TCU. FE
For further information, refer to “POWER DOOR LOCK — Super Lock —” (EL-301).
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
The multi-remote control system is controlled by the TCU.
NJEL0485S05 CL
For further information, refer to “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM” (EL-352).
FUNCTION MT
NJEL0485S06
I The TCU has the following control function.
Item Details of control AT
Switches the director indicators (Left, Right or All) when the combination
Direction indicators
switch or hazard switch is operated.
AX
Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with light switch in the
Light warning chime
1st or 2nd position and ignition switch “OFF”.
SU
Sounds warning chime when driver’s door is opened with key in ignition and
Ignition key warning chine the driver door lock knob (unlock sensor) is moved from the “unlock” posi-
tion to the “lock” position.
BR
Turn off rear window defogger and door mirror heater, if equipped, about 15
Rear window defogger timer
minutes after the rear window defogger switch is turned “ON”.
ST
Shuts off interior lamp in 30 minutes if any door is left open when ignition
Battery saver switch is “OFF”. The battery saver will reset if ignition switch is cycled or any
door is opened or closed.
RS
Keep interior lamp illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
I driver’s door is unlocked,
I the ignition is switched off, BT
Interior lamp timer I driver’s door is opened and then closed.
The timer is cancelled, and interior lamp turns off when:
I driver’s door is locked, or HA
I ignition switch is turned “ON”.

Power door lock Centrally locks and unlocks the vehicle

SC
Super lock Activates and de-activates the super lock system.

IDX

EL-381
 TIME CONTROL UNIT
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses =NJEL0486

The Timer Control Unit includes software to help during development testing, manufacturing and service. It
allows the technician to put it into Diagnostic Mode. In this mode, all switch inputs can be tested for continu-
ity.
When the timer control unit is in Diagnostic Mode, the control unit tests the component and indicate the result
by the hazard lamp flashing.

SEL496X

Checks
Once in Diagnostic Mode, the following inputs can be tested.
USER ACTION TCU Reaction COMPONENT TESTED

Driver’s door opened from closed (all

Hazards flash once Driver’s door open signal
other doors closed)

Passenger or rear door opened from

Hazard flash once Door open signal for opened door
closed (all other doors closed)

Driver’s door locked from unlocked Hazard flash once Driver’s door unlock sensor signal

Passenger door locked from unlocked Hazard flash once Assist door unlock sensor signal

Hazard switch is pressed from off Hazard flash once Hazard switch signal

Turn signal switch is moved to left from

Hazard flash once Left turn signal
off

Turn signal switch is moved to right from

Hazards flash once Right turn signal
off

Key turned to lock position is door Hazard flash once* Key cylinder lock switch signal

EL-382
 TIME CONTROL UNIT
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

USER ACTION TCU Reaction COMPONENT TESTED

Lighting switch turned 1st position or 2nd

Hazard flash once Tail lamp signal
GI
position from off

Key put in ignition from out Hazard flash once Key in detect signal
MA
Door lock/unlock switch is pressed Hazard flash once Central door lock/unlock signal

*) Hazard may flash a second time because of Driver’s door status signal change. The min. delay time between flash actions is 100
ms.
EM
In case the system does not operate as described above, check the concerned circuit for open or short. After
completion, the Diagnostic Mode can be switched off by pressing the rear defogger switch or by turning the LC
ignition to “ON”. The hazard lamp will flash at 3 Hz for 3 seconds to confirm that Diagnostic Mode has been
switched off.
EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-383
 TIME CONTROL UNIT
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0506

YEL767D

EL-384
TIME CONTROL UNIT
Schematic (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL768D

EL-385
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Component Parts and Harness Connetor Location

Component Parts and Harness Connetor

Location NJEL0406
For details, refer to “ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION” (EL-543) and
“HARNESS LAYOUT” (EL-550).

System Description NJEL0407

NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) has the following immobilizer functions:
I Since only NATS ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of NATS,
allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without a NATS registered key is prevented by NATS.
That is to say, NATS will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of
NATS.
I This version of NATS has dongle unit to improve its anti-theft performance (RHD models for Europe).
Dongle unit has its own ID which is registered into NATS IMMU. So if dongle unit is replaced, initialization
must be carried out.
I When malfunction of dongle unit is detected:
The security indicator lamp illuminates for about 15 minutes after ignition switch is turned to ON.
− When dongle unit has a malfunction and the indicator lamp is illuminated, engine can not be started.
However engine can be started only one time when security indicator lamp turns off in about 15 minutes
after ignition switch is turned to ON.
I All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been NATS registered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NATS compo-
nents.
I The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, NATS warns
outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
I When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up as follows.
With dongle Without dongle
Condition IGN ON and
MIL Security indicator MIL Security indicator

1. 6 times blinking
NATS malfunction
2. Staying ON after igni-
(except dongle unit) is — — Staying ON
tion switch is turned
detected
ON

Staying ON for about 15

Only malfunction of
— minutes after ignition — —
dongle unit is detected.
switch is turned ON

1. 6 times blinking
Malfunction of NATS
2. Staying ON after igni-
and engine related parts Staying ON Staying ON Staying ON
tion switch is turned
are detected.
ON

Only engine related part

Staying ON — Staying ON —
malfunction is detected.

Just after initialization of

— 6 times blinking — —
NATS

I NATS trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NATS ignition key IDs
must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NATS software.
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II
operation manual, NATS.
I When servicing a malfunction of the NATS (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or

EL-386
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
System Description (Cont’d)
registering another NATS ignition key ID no., it may be necessary to re-register original key iden-
tification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition GI
NJEL0408
The immobilizer function of the NATS consists of the following:
I NATS ignition key MA
I NATS immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder
I Engine control module (ECM)
EM
I Dongle unit (RHD models)
I Security indicator
I Navigation control unit (Models with Navigation system) LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

NEL776
RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-387
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Wiring Diagram — NATS —

Wiring Diagram — NATS — NJEL0487

QG ENGINE MODELS AND YD ENGINE MODELS WITH COMMON RAIL NJEL0487S06

YEL771D

EL-388
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Wiring Diagram — NATS — (Cont’d)
YD ENGINE MODELS WITHOUT COMMON RAIL NJEL0487S07

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL772D

EL-389
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
CONSULT-II

CONSULT-II NJEL0410
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NJEL0410S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

SEF094Y

2. Insert NATS program card into CONSULT-II.

: Program card
NATS-AEN02B
3. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON.
5. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

6. Select “NATS V.5.0”.

SEL027X

7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, NATS.

SEL150X

EL-390
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION=NJEL0410S02
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST GI
Description
MODE

C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all
NATS ignition keys are necessary. MA
[NATS ignition key/IMMU/ECM/Dongle unit]

SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart EL-391. EM
NOTE:
I When any initialization is performed, all ID previously reg- LC
istered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys must be
registered again.
I The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this EC
case, the system may show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or
“LOCK MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II
screen. FE
I When initialization is performed for RHD models for Europe,
security indicator will flash six times to demonstrate recognition
of the dongle unit ID. CL
I In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a
self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning. MT
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS NJEL0410S03
AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEL151X
HA

SC

IDX

EL-391
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART =NJEL0410S04
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....
Detected items (NATS program card (Self-diag-
Reference page
screen terms) nostic result
of “ENGINE”

NATS MAL- The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU com-

ECM INT CIRC-IMMU FUNCTION munication line is detected. EL-415
P1613

Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU

NATS MAL-
(In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU FUNCTION EL-416 (K9K & YD w c.r.)
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
P1612
not malfunctioning.) EL-397 (QG & YD w/o c.r.)

NATS MAL- IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
DIFFERENCE OF KEY FUNCTION verification between key ID and IMMU is NG. EL-420
P1615

NATS MAL- IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal.

CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY FUNCTION EL-421
P1614

NATS MAL- The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is

ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM FUNCTION NG. System initialization is required. EL-423
P1611

When the starting operation is carried out five or more

times consecutively under the following conditions,
NATS MAL-
NATS will shift the mode to one which prevents the
LOCK MODE FUNCTION EL-426
engine from being started.
P1610
I Unregistered ignition key is used.
I IMMU or ECM’s malfunctioning.

DON’T ERASE BEFORE All engine trouble codes except NATS trouble code has
— EL-412
CHECKING ENG DIAG been detected in ECM.

EL-392
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail

Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models

with Common Rail NJEL0590
GI
WORK FLOW NJEL0590S01

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

SEL729WE
EL-393
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
First perform the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “SMART ENTRANCE”
with CONSULT-II, when perform the each trouble diagnosis. Refer
to EL-390, “CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE”.
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 NJEL0590S02
Self-diagnosis related item
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or NO. OF ILLUSTRATION
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) ON SYSTEM DIAGRAM

PROCEDURE 1
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU (EL-396, “Diagnostic ECM B
Procedure 1”)

In rare case, “CHAIN

OF ECM-IMMU” might
be stored during key
—
registration procedure,
even if the system is not
malfunctioning.

Open circuit in battery

voltage line of IMMU C1
circuit

Open circuit in ignition

C2
line of IMMU circuit

Open circuit in ground

I Security indicator C3
PROCEDURE 2 line of IMMU circuit
lighting up*
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU (EL-397, “Diagnostic
I Engine cannot be Open circuit in commu-
Procedure 2”)
started nication line between C4
IMMU and ECM

Short circuit between

IMMU and ECM com-
C4
munication line and bat-
tery voltage line

Short circuit between

IMMU and ECM com-
C4
munication line and
ground line

ECM B

IMMU A

PROCEDURE 3 Unregistered key D

DIFFERENCE OF KEY (EL-399, “Diagnostic
Procedure 3”) IMMU A

EL-394
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART

SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or NO. OF ILLUSTRATION
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) ON SYSTEM DIAGRAM GI
I Security indicator Malfunction of key ID
E5
lighting up* chip MA
I Engine cannot be
started Communication line E1
between ANT/ AMP and
IMMU: EM
Open circuit or short E2
circuit of battery voltage
line or ground line LC
PROCEDURE 4
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY (EL-400, “Diagnostic Open circuit in power E3
Procedure 4”) source line of ANT/ AMP
circuit
EC
Open circuit in ground E4
line of ANT/ AMP circuit FE
Antenna amp. E6

Dongle unit G CL
IMMU A

PROCEDURE 5 System initialization has MT

F
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM (EL-403, “Diagnostic not yet been completed.
Procedure 5”) ECM B AT
PROCEDURE 7
LOCK MODE (EL-406, “Diagnostic LOCK MODE D
Procedure 7”) AX
DON’T ERASE Engine trouble data and
Security indicator light- WORK FLOW
BEFORE CHECKING NATS trouble data have — SU
ing up* (EL-393, “Work Flow”)
ENG DIAG been detected in ECM

*: When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
BR
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 NJEL0590S03
Non self-diagnosis related item
ST
REFERENCE PART NO. OF
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM
SYMPTOM ILLUSTRATION ON SYSTEM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode)
DIAGRAM
RS
Security ind. —

Open circuit between Fuse and BT

PROCEDURE 6 —
IMMU
Security ind. does not light up. (EL-404, “Diagnostic Proce-
dure 6”) Continuation of initialization
—
mode HA
IMMU A

Security ind. does not blink just PROCEDURE 8 NATS might be initialized with- — SC
after initialization even if the (EL-407, “RHD models only: out connecting dongle unit
vehicle is equipped with dongle Diagnostic Procedure 8”) properly.
unit.

Security ind. does not blink just Open circuit in ground line of C6
after ignition switch is turned to dongle unit circuit
ON when some malfunction
IDX
related to NATS is detected Open or short circuit in com- C5
even if the vehicle is equipped munication line between IMMU
with dongle unit. and dongle unit

Dongle unit G

EL-395
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

REFERENCE PART NO. OF

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM
SYMPTOM ILLUSTRATION ON SYSTEM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode)
DIAGRAM

Security ind. dose not blink just PROCEDURE 9 Open or short circuit starter —
after ignition switch is turned to (EL-408, “Diagnostic Proce- motor between smart entrance
ON. dure 9”) control unit
Engine can not be started*

*: CONSULT-II Self-diagnostic results display screen “no malfunction is detected”.

DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM NJEL0590S04

SIIA1667E

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NJEL0590S05

Self-diagnostic results:
“ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRC-
IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
2. Replace ECM.
Ref. part No. B
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual
NATS”.
SEL152X

EL-396
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NJEL0590S06
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not mal-
functioning. EM

LC

EC

FE

SEL292W CL
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes © GO TO 2. MT
No © GO TO EL-394, “SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1”.

AT
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU
1. Disconnect IMMU connector.
2. Check voltage between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 56 (R/B) and ground
AX
CONSULT-II or tester.
SU

BR

ST

RS
SIIA1669E
Battery voltage should exist.
BT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
HA
NG © Check the following
I 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector SC
Ref. Part No. C1

IDX

EL-397
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M42 terminal 29 (Y/G) and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.

SIIA1668E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
No © Check the following
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. part No. C2

4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Check continuity between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 53 (B) and ground.

SIIA1565E
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3

5 REPLACE IMMU (SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT)

1. Replace IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) Ref. part No. A
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
Does the engine start?
OK © IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) is malfunctioning.
No © I ECM is malfunctioning.
I Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
I Perform initialization with CONSULT-II
I For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”

EL-398
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 NJEL0590S07
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

EC

SEL367X FE
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes © GO TO 2. CL
No © GO TO EL-394, “SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1”.

MT
2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
AT
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
AX

SU

BR

ST

SEL297W
RS
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NATS ignition key?
Yes © I Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
BT
No © I IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) is malfunctioning.
I Replace IMMU (Smart entrance control unit). Ref. part No. A
I Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. HA
I For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

SC

IDX

EL-399
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 =NJEL0590S08
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

SEL957W

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO EL-394, “SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1”.

2 CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. INSTALLATION

Check NATS antenna amp. installation. Refer to EL-411, “How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp”.
OK or NG
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Reinstall NATS antenna amp. correctly.

3 CHECK NATS IGNITION KEY ID CHIP

Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
Does the engine start?
Yes © I Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
I Replace the ignition key.
I Ref. part No. E5
I Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
I For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
No © GO TO 4.

EL-400
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR NATS ANTENNA AMP.

Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. harness connector M31 terminal 1 (G) and ground with analogue tester. GI

MA

EM

LC

SIIA1670E EC
Before turning ignition switch “ON”
Voltage: 0V
Just after turning ignition switch “ON”: FE
Pointer of tester should move.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
CL
NG © I Check harness for open or short between NATS antenna amp and IMMU (Smart
entrance control unit). MT
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace IMMU, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For
initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”. AT

5 CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE-1 AX

Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. harness connector M31 terminal 3 (G/W) and ground with analogue tester.

SU

BR

ST

RS
SIIA1671E
Before turning ignition switch “ON”
Voltage: 0V BT
Just after turning ignition switch “ON”:
Pointer of tester should move.
OK or NG
HA
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © I Check harness for open or short between NATS antenna amp and IMMU (Smart SC
entrance control unit).
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace IMMU, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For
initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

IDX

EL-401
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

6 CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. SIGNAL LINE-2

Check voltage between NATS antenna amp. harness connector M31 terminal 7 (Y/G) and ground with analogue tester.

SIIA1672E
Before turning ignition switch “ON”
Voltage: 0V
Just after turning ignition switch “ON”:
Pointer of tester should move.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © I Check harness for open or short between NATS antenna amp and IMMU (Smart
entrance control unit).
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace IMMU, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For
initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

7 CHECK NATS ANTENNA AMP. GROUND LINE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”
2. Disconnect NATS antenna amp connector.
3. Check continuity between NATS antenna amp. harness connector M31 terminal 5 (G/OR) and ground.

SIIA1673E
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © I NATS antenna amp. malfunctioning.
Ref. part No. E6
NG © I Check harness for open or short between NATS antenna amp and IMMU (Smart
entrance control unit).
NOTE:
If harness is OK, replace IMMU, perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For
initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

EL-402
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 =NJEL0590S09
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM”:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM. EM

LC

EC

FE

SEL958W CL
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes © GO TO 2. MT
No © GO TO EL-394, “SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1”.

AT
2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
AX

SU

BR

ST

SEL297W
RS
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
BT
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © I Start engine. (END)
I (System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. B) HA
No © I ECM is malfunctioning.
I Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B SC
I Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
I For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

IDX

EL-403
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 =NJEL0590S10
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1 CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 12 and No. 30, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
10A fuse OK?
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace fuse.

2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP

1. Install 10A fuse.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be light up.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M171 terminal 34 and ground.

YEL842D
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp.

EL-404
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT FUNCTION

1. Disconnect combination meter connector. GI
2. Connect smart entrance control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M194 terminal 34 (L/Y) and ground.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1654E
Continuity should exist intermittently. FE
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and combination
meter.
CL
NG © IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) is malfunctioning.
I Replace smart entrance control unit MT
Ref. part No. A
I Perform initialization with CONSULT-II
I For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS” AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-405
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 =NJEL0590S11
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

SEL960W

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO EL-394, “SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1”.

2 ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes © I System is OK.
I (Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.)
No © GO TO 3.

3 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © System is OK.
No © GO TO 4.

EL-406
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

4 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN

1. Replace IMMU (Smart entrance control unit). GI
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL297W
NOTE: FE
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © System is OK. (IMMU is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A)
CL
No © I ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B MT
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
AT
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 NJEL0590S12

1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION

AX
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II
Check harness connector connection between Dongle unit harness connector M102 and IMMU (Smart entrance control
unit) harness connector M193. SU
Then initialize NATS. For the initialization operation, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”
Does the security indicator blink just after initialization?
BR
Yes © System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.)
No © GO TO 2.
ST
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT
1. Disconnect dongle unit harness connector.
RS
2. Check continuity between dongle unit harness connector M102 terminal 1 (B) and ground.

BT

HA

SC

SIIA1674E
Continuity should exist.
IDX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair harness.

EL-407
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect dongle unit and IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector.
2. Check continuity between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M193 terminal 9 (PU) and dongle unit
harness connector M102 terminal 7 (PU).

SIIA1675E
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M193 terminal 9 (PU) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization procedure, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
NG © Repair harness.

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 NJEL0590S13

M/T Models NJEL0590S1301

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) connector.
2. Check voltage between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 58 (B/W) and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.

SIIA1684E
Ignition switch START position:
Battery voltage should exist.
Ignition switch OFF position: 0V
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following
I Ignition switch
I Harness for open or short between ignition switch and IMMU (Smart entrance control
unit)

EL-408
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

2 CHECK START SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch START. GI
2. Check voltage between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 59 (B/Y) and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1685E
Battery voltage should exist. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
CL
NG © Replace IMMU (Smart entrance control unit).

MT
3 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT FOR IMMU
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Disconnect IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector and starter motor harness connector. AT
3. Check continuity between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 59 (B/Y) and starter
motor harness connector F19 (TD), F41 (QG) or F42 (GC) terminal 1 (B/Y).
AX

SU

BR

ST
SIIA1686E
Continuity should exist. RS
OK or NG
OK © Check starter motor. Refer to SC-13, “STARTING SYSTEM”. BT
NG © Harness for open or short between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) and starter
motor.
HA

SC

IDX

EL-409
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)
A/T, CVT Models NJEL0590S1302

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) connector.
2. Check voltage between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 59 (B/W) and ground
with CONSULT-II or tester.

SIIA1687E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following
I Park/neutral position relay
I Harness for open or short between park/neutral position relay and IMMU

2 CHECK START SIGNAL

1. Connect IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) connector.
2. Check voltage between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 58 (P) and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.

SIIA1688E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace IMMU (Smart entrance control unit).

EL-410
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/QG and YD Engine Models with Common Rail (Cont’d)

3 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) connector and park/neutral position switch connector. GI
2. Check continuity between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) harness connector M195 terminal 58 (P) and park/neutral
position switch harness connector F17 terminal 1 (P).
MA

EM

LC

EC
SIIA1689E
Continuity should exist. FE
OK or NG
OK © Check starter motor. Refer to SC-13, “STARTING SYSTEM”.
CL
NG © Harness for open or short between IMMU (Smart entrance control unit) and park/neutral
position switch.
MT
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp NJEL0591
NOTE: AT
I If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NATS sys-
tem will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on
CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE” or “CHAIN AX
OF IMMU- KEY”.
I Initialization is not necessary only when NATS antenna
amp. is replaced with a new one.
SU

BR
SIIA1683E

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-411
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models

Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without

Common Rail and K9K Engine Models NJEL0411
WORK FLOW NJEL0411S01

SEL729WE
EL-412
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 NJEL0411S02
(Self-diagnosis related item)
GI
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or NO. OF ILLUSTRATION
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) ON SYSTEM DIAGRAM
MA
PROCEDURE 1
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU ECM B
(EL-415)
EM
In rare case, “CHAIN
OF ECM-IMMU” might
be stored during key
registration procedure,
— LC
even if the system is not
malfunctioning.
EC
Open circuit in battery
voltage line of IMMU C1
circuit FE
Open circuit in ignition
C2
line of IMMU circuit
CL
Open circuit in ground
C3
line of IMMU circuit
PROCEDURE 2
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
(EL-416) Open circuit in commu- MT
nication line between C4
IMMU and ECM
AT
Short circuit between
IMMU and ECM com-
C4
munication line and bat- AX
tery voltage line
I Security indicator Short circuit between
lighting up* IMMU and ECM com-
C4
SU
I Engine cannot be munication line and
started ground line

ECM B
BR
IMMU A
ST
PROCEDURE 3 Unregistered key D
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
(EL-420) IMMU A
RS
Malfunction of key ID
E
chip

IMMU A BT
Open circuit in ground
PROCEDURE 4 C6
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
(EL-421)
line of dongle unit circuit HA
Open or short circuit in
line between IMMU and C5
dongle unit SC
Dongle unit G

System initialization has

PROCEDURE 5 F
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM not yet been completed.
(EL-423)
ECM B IDX
PROCEDURE 7
LOCK MODE LOCK MODE D
(EL-426)

EL-413
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART

SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or NO. OF ILLUSTRATION
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) ON SYSTEM DIAGRAM

I MIL staying ON DON’T ERASE Engine trouble data and

WORK FLOW
I Security indicator BEFORE CHECKING NATS trouble data have —
(EL-412)
lighting up* ENG DIAG been detected in ECM

*: When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.
*: When the vehicle is equipped with a dongle unit (RHD models for Europe), the security indicator blinks 6 times just after the ignition
switch is turned to ON. Then the security indicator lights up while the ignition key is in the “ON” position.

SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 NJEL0411S03

(Non self-diagnosis related item)
REFERENCE PART NO. OF
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM
SYMPTOM ILLUSTRATION ON SYSTEM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode)
DIAGRAM

Security ind. —

Open circuit between Fuse and

—
PROCEDURE 6 IMMU
Security ind. does not light up.
(EL-424) Continuation of initialization
—
mode

IMMU A

NATS might be initialized with-

Security ind. does not blink just out connecting dongle unit —
after initialization even if the properly.
vehicle is equipped with dongle
unit. Open circuit in ground line of
C6
dongle unit circuit
PROCEDURE 8
Security ind. does not blink just (EL-428)
Open or short circuit in com-
after ignition switch is turned to munication line between IMMU C5
ON when some malfunction and dongle unit
related to NATS is detected
even if the vehicle is equipped
with dongle unit. Dongle unit G

DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM NJEL0411S04

SEL028X

EL-414
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NJEL0411S05
Self-diagnostic results:
“ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRC-
IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B.
2. Replace ECM.
MA
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual EM
NATS”.

SEL152X LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-415
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NJEL0411S06
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not mal-
functioning.

SEL366X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 8 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEL302WB

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following
I 10A fuse (No. 36, located in the fusible link and fuse box) — (Gasoline engine)
I 20A fuse (No. 34, located in the fusible link and fuse box) — (Diesel engine)
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. Part No. C1

EL-416
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

3 CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL

1. Turn ignition switch ON. GI
2. Check voltage between terminal 7 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

MA

EM

YEL808C
LC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
EC
NG © Check the following
I 10A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector FE
Ref. part No. C2

4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

CL
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between IMMU terminal 4 and ground. MT

AT

AX

SU

SEL304WB
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
ST
NG © Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-417
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

5 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) and IMMU terminal 1.

SEL305WB

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair harness or connector.
Ref. part No. C4

6 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.

SEL306WB

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Communication line is short-circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4

EL-418
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

7 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. GI
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

SEL307WB
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. FE
NG © Communication line is short-circuited with ground line.
Repair harness or connectors. CL
Ref. part No. C4

8 SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK

MT
1. Check the signal between ECM terminal 116 (Gasoline engine) or 410 (Diesel engine) and ground with CONSULT-II or
oscilloscope when ignition switch is turned “ON”. AT
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec. just after ignition switch is
turned “ON”.
AX

SU

BR

ST
SEL730W

OK or NG RS
OK © IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A BT
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
NG © ECM is malfunctioning. HA
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”. SC

IDX

EL-419
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 =NJEL0411S07
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

SEL367X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.

2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NATS ignition key?
Yes © Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No © IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

EL-420
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 =NJEL0411S08
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

EC

SEL368X FE
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes © GO TO 2. CL
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.

MT
2 CHECK NATS IGNITION KEY ID CHIP
Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
AT
Does the engine start?
Yes © Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
Replace the ignition key.
AX
Ref. part No. E
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”. SU
No © Models without dongle unit
IMMU is malfunctioning. BR
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”. ST
Models with dongle unit
GO TO 3.
RS
3 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION
Check harness connector connection between M31 and M102. BT
Does the engine start?
Yes © System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.) HA
No © GO TO 4.

SC

IDX

EL-421
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT

Check continuity between dongle unit terminal 1 and ground.

SEL029X

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Repair harness.

5 CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT

SEL030X

Yes or No
Yes © Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For the initialization procedure, refer to “CON-
SULT-II operation manual NATS.
No © Repair harness.

EL-422
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 =NJEL0411S09
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen GI
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. MA

EM

LC

EC

SEL369X FE
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM”:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM. CL
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes © GO TO 2. MT
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.

AT
2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
AX

SU

BR

ST

SEL297W
RS
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
BT
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © Start engine. (END)
(System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. B) HA
No © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B SC
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

IDX

EL-423
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 =NJEL0411S10
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1 CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Is 10A fuse OK?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Replace fuse.

2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP

1. Install 10A fuse.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be light up.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check voltage between combination meter (security indicator lamp) connector terminal 23 and ground.

YEL809C

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for open or short between fuse and combination meter.

4 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP

Check security Indicator Lamp.
Is security indicator lamp OK?
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Repair or replace combination meter.

EL-424
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

5 CHECK IMMU FUNCTION

1. Connect IMMU connector. GI
2. Disconnect combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between IMMU terminal 6 and ground.
MA

EM

LC
YEL810C

OK or NG EC
OK © Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and IMMU.
NG © IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
FE
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.
CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-425
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 =NJEL0411S11
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

SEL371X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.

2 ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes © System is OK.
(Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.)
No © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION

Check IMMU installation. Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-429.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Reinstall IMMU correctly.

EL-426
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)

4 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. GI
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen. FE
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © System is OK.
CL
No © GO TO 5.

MT
5 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN
1. Replace IMMU.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. AT
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

AX

SU

BR

ST
SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen. RS
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © System is OK. (IMMU is malfunctioning. Ref. part No. A) BT
No © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. HA
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NATS”.

SC

IDX

EL-427
 NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
Trouble Diagnoses/YD Engine Models without Common Rail and K9K Engine Models (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 =NJEL0411S14

1 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
Check harness connector connection between M31 and M102.
Then initialize NATS. For the initialization operation, refer to “CONSULT-II operation NATS”.
Does the security indicator blink just after initialization?
Yes © System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.)
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT

Check continuity between dongle unit terminal 1 and ground.

SEL029X

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Repair harness.

3 CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT

SEL030X

Yes or No
Yes © Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For the initialization procedure, refer to “CON-
SULT-II Operation Manual NATS”.
No © Repair harness.

EL-428
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
How to Replace NATS IMMU

How to Replace NATS IMMU NJEL0412

NOTE:
I If NATS IMMU is not installed correctly, NATS system will GI
not operate properly and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CON-
SULT-II screen will show “LOCK MODE”.
MA

EM

SEL096WC LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-429
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description

System Description NJEL0592

The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle’s current
position according to the following three signals: Travel distance of
the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning
angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular
velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined
by the GPS antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing
the calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map
DVD-ROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching),
SKIA0370E
and indicated on the screen with a current-location mark.

By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the

GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data
can be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.

SEL684V

TRAVEL DISTANCE NJEL0592S01

Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen-
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine
adjustment function has been adopted.
TRAVEL DIRECTION NJEL0592S02
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a
gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS
information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit
and demerit, input signals from them are prioritized in each situa-
tion. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with
more detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is
detected more accurately.
Type Advantage Disadvantage

I Direction errors may accumulate when the

Gyroscope (angular velocity sen- I Can detect the vehicle’s turning angle
vehicle is driven for long distances without
sor) quite accurately.
stopping.

I Can detect the vehicle’s travel direction I Correct direction cannot be detected when
GPS antenna (GPS information)
(North/South/East/West). the vehicle speed is low.

MAP-MATCHING NJEL0592S03
Map-matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This
is done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map DVD-ROM stored
in the DVD-ROM drive.
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the
vehicle is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS
information is hard to receive. In this case, the current-location
mark on the display must be corrected manually.
SEL685V

EL-430
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVD-ROM.
GI

MA

EM

LC
I In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination
will be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the
vehicle is currently driven has been judged and the current-lo- EC
cation mark has been repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong FE
road can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same pri-
ority. Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on CL
either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the
steering wheel and configuration of the road.
SEL686V
MT
I Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on
which the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map AT
DVD-ROM, or when the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map- AX
matching function may find another road and position the cur-
rent-location mark on it. Then, when the correct road is
detected, the current-location mark may leap to it. SU
I Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel
direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road
data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when BR
SKIA0613E
there is an excessive gap between the current vehicle position
and the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not
possible. ST

RS

BT

HA

GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) NJEL0592S04

SC
GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and con-
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an
orbit around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000
miles).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle’s position in three dimen- IDX
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-di-
mensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from
three GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle’s
SEL526V
position in two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude
EL-431
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
data calculated previously by using radio waves from four or more
GPS satellites (two-dimensional positioning).
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions.
I In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deterio-
rate when the altitude of the vehicle position changes.
I There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in posi-
tion detected by three-dimensional positioning, which is more
accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can
be even lower depending on the arrangement of the GPS sat-
ellites utilized for the positioning.
I Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area
where radio waves from the GPS satellite do not reach, such
as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated
highway. Radio waves from the GPS satellites may not be
received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
I Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is
stopped.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NJEL0592S05

AV and NAVI Control Unit NJEL0592S0501
I The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
I Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by com-
bining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map.
Locational information is shown on liquid crystal display panel.

PKIA0248E

DVD-ROM Drive NJEL0592S0502

Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information
can be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc.
Map DVD-ROM NJEL0592S0503
I The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and
other pertinent information.
I To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination
functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format.
Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufac-
turers cannot be used.
PKIA0249E
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor) NJEL0592S0504
I The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle
steering angle.
I The gyro is built into the navigation (AV and NAVI) control unit.

EL-432
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
BIRDVIEWT =NJEL0592S06
The BIRDVIEWT provides a detailed and easily seen display of
road conditions covering the vehicle’s immediate to distant area. GI

MA

EM

LC
I MAP DISPLAY
EC

FE

CL

SKIA1377E
MT
I BIRDVIEWT
AT

AX

SU

BR
SKIA1378E

Description
I
NJEL0592S0601
Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate
ST
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
I Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six verti- RS
cal grid lines indicate display depth and direction.
I Drawing line area shows open space, depth, and immediate
front area. Each area is to a scale of approximately 5:6:25. BT
I Pushing the “ZOOM IN” button during operation displays the
scale change and the view point height on the left side of the
screen. HA
The height of the view point increases or decreases when
“ZOOM” or “WIDE” is selected with the joystick.
SC

IDX

SEL691V

EL-433
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
MAP DISPLAY NJEL0592S07
Function of each icon is as follows:
1. Azimuth indication.
2. Position marker.
− The tip of the arrow shows the current position. The shaft of
the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is travel-
ing.
3. GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions).
4. Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale).
SKIA1379E

FUNCTION OF MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH NJEL0592S08

Display With Pushed “DEST” Switch NJEL0592S0801
I Easy Mode

SKIA1623E

I Expert Mode

SKIA1381E

The Function of Each Icon Is as Follows:

MODE
Icon Description
Easy Expert

Address Book × Favorite place can be saved to memory.

Address/Street × × The destination can be searched from the address.

Point of Interest
× × The destination of favorite facility can be searched.
(POI)

Previous Dest. × The previous ten destinations stored in memory are displayed.

Intersection × The destination can be searched from the intersection.

City Center × The destination can be searched from city name.

Map × The destination can be searched from the map.

Home × Sets the home as a destination.

Help × Explanation of Navigational functions appear on the Display.

EL-434
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Display With Pushed “ROUTE” Switch NJEL0592S0802
I Easy Mode
GI

MA

EM

SKIA1382E LC
I Expert Mode
EC

FE

CL

SKIA1383E
MT
The Function of Each Icon Is as Follows:
MODE
AT
Icon Description
Easy Expert
AX
The selected facility is set as the destination or waypoint.
Quick Stop × ×
(Route guidance has been turned OFF or the destination has been reached)

Where am I? × × Next, current and previous street names can be displayed. SU

The following items can be set.
I Complete Route
Route Info.* × I Turn List
BR
I Route Simulation
(Displayed only when the destination area has been set.)
ST
Change the destination or add the transit points of the route set in the route guide.
Edit Route* × (Displayed only when the automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and the
recommended route is not followed.) RS
Route Calculation × This key is used to start the route calculation after all the settings are completed.

Help × Explanation of Navigational functions appear on the Display. BT

*: When destinations have been entered, route guidance has been turned OFF or destination has been reached, “Route Info.” and “Edit
Route” are not displayed.
HA

Display With Pushed “SETTING” Switch NJEL0592S0803

SC

IDX

SKIA1384E

EL-435
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
The Function of Each Icon Is as Follows:
Icon Description

Sound quality can be adjusted, and also ON/OFF setting of switch beep sound can be performed.
Audio
Noise Compensation ON/OFF setting can be performed.

Display Settings of display can be performed.

Language can be selected for the display and voice guidance.

Language
Use the program CD-ROM disc to change the language.

Navigation Settings and adjusting of navigation can be performed.

Navigation Expert Mode Easy Mode and Expert Mode can be switched.

Guidance Volume The volume and/or on/off of voice prompt can be controlled by the joystick.

Help Explanation of Navigational Functions Appear on the Display.

“LANGUAGE” mode NJEL0592S0804

Select one of the languages which appear on the screen.
NOTE:
Languages that do not appear on the screen must be loaded from
program disk.

SKIA1399E

Navigation Settings NJEL0592S0805

How To Perform Navigation Settings
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “SETTING” switch.
3. Select “NAVIGATION”.

SKIA1385E

Application Items
Reference
Icon Description
page

View Map display mode can be switched. EL-437

Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or
Heading EL-437
the actual driving direction of the vehicle.

Icons of facilities can be displayed.

Nearby Display Icons EL-437
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety selections.

Save Current Location Current vehicle location can be registered in Address Book. EL-438

EL-436
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)

Reference
Icon Description
page
GI
Edit Address Book Address Book can be edited. EL-438

Clear Memory Address Book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted. EL-438
MA
Auto Re-route ON/OFF ON/OFF of Auto Re-route can be switched. EL-438

Quick Stop Customer Setting One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop. EL-438
EM
Set Average speed for Estimated Average vehicle speed can be set to calibrate estimated journey time for the
EL-439
Journey Time destination.
LC
The GPS data includes longitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea
level) of the present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area
GPS Information in which the vehicle is being driven. EL-439
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite posi-
EC
tion.

Avoid Area Setting A particular area can be avoided when routing. — FE

Tracking on/off Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed. EL-439

Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position CL

Adjust Current Location marker also can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the EL-439
display is not matched with the actual direction.
MT
“VIEW” MODE NJEL0592S09
Select “Bird ViewT” or “Plan view” icon. AT
I To open the map screen display with Bird ViewT, select “Bird
ViewT”.
I To open the map screen display with Plan View, select “Plan
AX
View”.
SU

BR
SKIA0554E

“HEADING” MODE
I To display North up, select “North up”.
NJEL0592S10 ST
I To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
RS

BT

HA
SKIA0561E

“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE NJEL0592S11

SC
I Select an icon to display on the map screen.

IDX

SKIA1394E

EL-437
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
“SAVE CURRENT LOCATION” MODE NJEL0592S12
I The current vehicle location can be registered in “Address
Book”.
NOTE:
“Address Book” can store 50 items max.

SKIA1388E

“EDIT ADDRESS BOOK” MODE NJEL0592S13

I Edit the items registered in Address Book.

SKIA0560E

“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE NJEL0592S14

I To delete all the stored places in “Address Book”, “Avoid Area”
and “Previous Dest”, select “Yes”.

SKIA0566E

“AUTO RE-ROUTE” MODE NJEL0592S15

I To Perform the auto re-route of route, select “ON”.
I Not to Perform the auto re-route of route, select “OFF”.

SKIA0558E

“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTINGS” MODE NJEL0592S16

I Select a category for the “Quick Stop” menu.

SKIA1389E

EL-438
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
“SET AVERAGE SPEED FOR ESTIMATED JOURNEY
TIME” MODE NJEL0592S17
I Set the average vehicle speed to calibrate the estimated jour- GI
ney time for the destination.
I Set three items; “Freeway”, “Main Roads”, and “Ordinary
Roads”. MA

EM

SKIA1397E LC
“GPS INFORMATION” MODE NJEL0592S18
I Latitude, longitude, altitude, astrometric state, and satellite EC
location are displayed as GPS information.
NOTE:
Altitude is displayed only in three-dimensional status. FE

CL

SKIA0555E
MT
“TRACKING” MODE NJEL0592S19
I To leave no trail on the map, select “Off”. AT
I To leave a trail in the map, select “On”.
NOTE: AX
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the
memory.
SU

BR
SKIA0559E

“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” MODE

1.
NJEL0592S20
Select an icon “right” or “left” to calibrate the heading direction.
ST
(Arrow marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.)
RS

BT

HA
SKIA1395E

2. Select “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the SC

arrow mark.

IDX

SKIA1396E

EL-439
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
GUIDE VOLUME SETTING NJEL0592S21
Description NJEL0592S2101
Following voice guidance setting can be changed.

SKIA1400E

Activation/Deactivation Setting NJEL0592S2102

I The voice prompt can be turned on/off by pressing the “Guid-
ance Volume” button.
Voice Volume Setting NJEL0592S2103
I Volume of the voice can be controlled by bending the joystick
to left/right.
NATS NAVI LINK NJEL0592S22
Description NJEL0592S2201
The link with the NATS IMMU implies that the AV and NAVI control
unit can basically only be operated if connected to the matching
NATS IMMU to which the AV and NAVI control unit was initially fit-
ted on the production line.
The Navigation system does not operate because it is judged that
the code collation with NATS IMMU is illegal when the control unit
of other cars is installed.

Precautions for AV and NAVI Control Unit

Replacement NJEL0593
I When replacing the AV and NAVI control unit, eject the map
DVD-ROM before disconnecting the battery.
I The AV and NAVI control unit has the following information
stored in its memory. Record the memory contents before
replacing the control unit, and input them in the new unit as
necessary.
<RADIO>
I Preset frequency
I Area for indicating station, selection of overlapped sta-
tions
<CD>
I Program status
<Sound quality>
I Volume balance memory set values
I Equalizer memory set values
<Image quality>
I Brightness of light when ON/OFF
I Dimming switching
I Display color switching
EL-440
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Precautions for AV and NAVI Control Unit Replacement (Cont’d)
<Navigation mode>
I Latest status (map screen/bird viewT, reduced scale, rota-
tion angle of map screen, route guide ON/OFF, track GI
ON/OFF, etc.)
I Current position
I Destination, passing point 1 - 5 MA
I Registered places, their names, etc.
NOTE: EM
Only removing the battery does not erase the memory.

LC
Component Parts Location NJEL0594
For details, refer to “ELECTRICAL UNIT LOCATION” (EL-543) and EC
“HARNESS LAYOUT” (EL-550).

FE

CL

MT
Location of Antenna NJEL0595
Refer to EL-214, “Location of Antenna”. AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-441
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic

Schematic NJEL0596

YEL774D

EL-442
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —

Wiring Diagram — NAVI — NJEL0597

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL775D

EL-443
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)

YEL776D

EL-444
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL777D

EL-445
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)

YEL778D

EL-446
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL779D

EL-447
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — COMM —

Wiring Diagram — COMM — NJEL0598

MODELS WITH LCD DISPLAY NJEL0598S02

YEL738D

EL-448
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — COMM — (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL739D

EL-449
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit

Terminals and Reference Value for AV and

NAVI Control Unit NJEL0599
I For measurements made with IGN switch ON, if possible, measure with engine running to prevent battery
discharge.
I Use a circuit tester and oscilloscope or CONSULT-ll for measurement.
Terminal No. (wire
Signal Condition
color) Example of symp-
Item input/ Voltage
Ignition tom
+ − output Operation
switch

1 (B) ground Ground — ON — Approx. 0V —

2 (Y) Battery System does not

ground Input OFF — Battery voltage
3 (Y) power work properly.

4 (B) ground Ground — ON — Approx. 0V —

Illumination
5 (BR) ground — ON — Approx. 0V —
ground

System does not

6 (P) ground ACC signal Input ACC — Battery voltage
work properly.

Only route guide

voice guide Press the “voice” and operation
7 (BR) 8 (Y) Output ON
signal switch. guide are not
heard.

SKIA0171J

Shield
9(B) — — — — — —
ground

Vertical syn-
Superimposed
11 (B) 17 chronizing Input ON —
screen is rolling.
signal

SKIA0161E

RGB area Press the “info”s- RGB screen is not

12 (R) 17 Output ON
signal witch. shown.

SKIA0162E

Select“ Display” in
Horizontal “Setting” mode and Superimposed
13 (BR) 17 synchroniz- Input ON display the rear- screen is not
ing signal view picture on the shown.
screen.

SKIA0163E

EL-450
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit (Cont’d)

Terminal No. (wire

Signal Condition
color) Example of symp-
Item input/ Voltage
tom
GI
output Ignition
+ − Operation
switch
MA

RGB syn- EM
Press the “MAP” RGB screen is roll-
15 (G) 17 chronizing Output ON
switch. ing.
signal
LC
SKIA0164E

RGB
EC
17 ground — ON — Approx. 0V —
Ground

FE
Select “SCREEN
ADJUSTMENT” of
18 (Y) 17
RGB signal
Output ON CONFIRMATION/
RGB screen looks CL
(R: red) bluish.
ADJUSTMENT
function.
SKIA0165E
MT

Select “SCREEN
AT
ADJUSTMENT” of
RGB signal RGB screen looks
21 (W) 17 Output ON CONFIRMATION/
(G: green)
ADJUSTMENT
reddish. AX
function.
SKIA0166E
SU

Select “SCREEN BR
ADJUSTMENT” of
RGB signal RGB screen looks
24 (L) 17 Output ON CONFIRMATION/
(B: blue) yellowish.
ADJUSTMENT ST
function.

SKIA0167E
RS
Optical
sensor is
Approx. 3.5V or more BT
Lighting exposed
to light. Screen does not
Illumination switch
25 switch between
ground control sig- Input ON ON Optical
(R/G)
nal (position sensor is
daytime mode and HA
nighttime mode.
1) not Approx. 1.5V or less
exposed
to light.
SC
A/C operation is
not possible.
Ignition sig-
27 (Y/G) ground Input ON — Battery voltage Vehicle information
nal
setting is not pos-
sible. IDX
Shield
31 (P) — — — — — —
ground

EL-451
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit (Cont’d)

Terminal No. (wire

Signal Condition
color) Example of symp-
Item input/ Voltage
Ignition tom
+ − output Operation
switch

AT selector lever in The navigation cur-

Battery voltage
R-position rent-location mark
Reverse sig-
32 (G/W) ground Input ON moves strangely
nal
AT selector lever when the vehicle is
Approx. 3.0V or less
not in R-position moving backwards.

Navigation current-
Vehicle When vehicle
location mark does
33 ground speed signal Input ON speed is approx.
not indicate the
(2-pulse) 40 km/h (25 MPH)
correct position.

ELF1080D

Clock cannot be
Communica- adjusted.
Display the vehicle
34 (R) ground tion signal Output ON Vehicle information
information screen.
(AV - ME) screen is not
shown.
SKIA0169E

Clock cannot be
Perform various
Communica- adjusted.
settings on the
35 (G) ground tion signal Input ON Vehicle information
vehicle information
(ME - AV) screen is not
screen.
shown.

SKIA0170E

Shield
40 — — — — — —
ground

A/C commu-
nication sig- A/C operation is
43 (L/R) ground Output ON —
nal (AV - not possible.
AC)

SKIA0172E

A/C commu-
nication sig- A/C status is not
44 (L/W) ground Input ON —
nal (AV - indicated correctly.
AC)

SKIA0173E

EL-452
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit (Cont’d)

Terminal No. (wire

Signal Condition
color) Example of symp-
Item input/ Voltage
tom
GI
output Ignition
+ − Operation
switch
MA

EM
A/C clock A/C status is not
45 (L) ground Input ON —
signal indicated correctly.
LC
SKIA0174E

Shield
EC
46 (B) — — — — — —
ground

FE

Communica-
Input/ System does not CL
47 (R) ground tion signal ON —
output work properly.
(+)
MT
SKIA0175E

AT

Communica-
Input/ System does not AX
48 (G) ground tion signal ON —
output work properly.
(-)
SU
SKIA0176E

Connector is not
Navigation system BR
66 67 GPS signal Input ON Approx. 5 V GPS correction is
connected.
not possible.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-453
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit

Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit NJEL0600

Terminal No.
Signal Condition
(wire color) Example of
Item input/ Voltage
Ignition symptom
+ − output Operation
switch

Select “SCREEN
RGB signal ADJUSTMENT” of RGB screen
1 (Y) 4 Input ON
(R: red) CONFIRMATION/ looks bluish.
ADJUSTMENT function.

SKIA0165E

Select “SCREEN
RGB signal ADJUSTMENT” of RGB screen
2 (W) 4 Input ON
(G: green) CONFIRMATION/ looks reddish.
ADJUSTMENT function.

SKIA0166E

Select “SCREEN
RGB signal ADJUSTMENT” of RGB screen
3 (L) 4 Input ON
(B: blue) CONFIRMATION/ looks yellowish.
ADJUSTMENT function.

SKIA0167E

Shield
4 — — — — — —
ground

Select“ Display” in “Set-

Horizontal Superimposed
5 ting” mode and display
4 synchroniz- Output ON screen is not
(BR) the rear view picture on
ing signal shown.
the screen.

SKIA0163E

Vertical syn-
Superimposed
6 (B) 4 chronizing Output ON —
screen is rolling.
signal

SKIA0161E

RGB syn-
RGB screen is
7 (G) 4 chronizing Input ON Press the “MAP” switch.
rolling.
signal

SKIA0164E

EL-454
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Display Unit (Cont’d)

Terminal No.
Signal Condition
(wire color) Example of
Item input/ Voltage
symptom
GI
output Ignition
+ − Operation
switch
MA

EM
RGB area RGB screen is
8 (R) 4 Input ON Press the “info” switch.
signal not shown.
LC
SKIA0162E
EC

Communica- FE
12 Input/ System does not
ground tion signal ON —
(W) output work properly.
(-)
CL
SKIA0176E
MT

Communica- AT
Input/ System does not
13 (B) ground tion signal ON —
output work properly.
(+)
AX
SKIA0175E

Shield
SU
14 — — — — — —
ground

19 (P) ground ACC signal Input ACC — Battery voltage

Screen is not BR
shown.

21 (Y)
ground
Battery
Input OFF — Battery voltage
Screen is not ST
23 (Y) power shown.

22 (B) ground Ground — ON — Approx. 0V — RS

24 (B) ground Ground — ON — Approx. 0V —

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-455
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for Multifunction Switch

Terminals and Reference Value for

Multifunction Switch =NJEL0601

Terminal No.
Signal Condition
(wire color) Example of
Item input/ Voltage
Ignition symptom
+ − output Operation
switch

All operations
1 (B) ground Ground — ON — —
do not work.

Multifunction
Illumination Illumination control switch
Changes between approx. 0 Switch illumi-
2 (BR) ground control sig- Input ON is operated by lighting
and approx. 12V. nation cannot
nal switch in 1st position.
be controlled.

Optical sensor Screen does

is exposed to Approx. 3.5V or more not switch
Illumination Lighting light. between day-
4 (Y/R) ground control sig- Input ON switch ON
time mode
nal (position 1) Optical sensor
is not exposed Approx. 1.5V or less and nighttime
to light. mode.

All operations
6 (P) ground ACC Input ACC — Battery voltage
do not work.

Rear defog- Press rear defogger switch. Approx. 5V Rear defogger

9 (L/Y) ground ger ON sig- Output ON does not
nal — Approx. 0V work.

Rear defog- Turn rear defogger switch Rear defogger

Battery voltage
10 (L/R) ground ger indicator Input ON ON. indicator does
signal OFF Approx. 0V not illuminate.

Communica- System does

11 (L) Input/
ground tion signal ON — not work prop-
12 (B) output
(+) erly.

SKIA0175E

Communica- System does

13 (P) Input/
ground tion signal ON — not work prop-
14 (W) output
(-) erly.

SKIA0176E

15 Shield
ground — ON — — —
16 ground

EL-456
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Function

Self-Diagnosis Function NJEL0602

DESCRIPTION
I Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the confirmation/
NJEL0602S01
GI
adjustment mode operated manually.
I Self-diagnosis mode checks connections between all units and performs individual unit diagnosis for all MA
units in system. Results are displayed on LCD display.
I Check/adjustment mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and judgment by an
operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the set value, and EM
to display the error record of the navigation system.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS ITEM NJEL0602S02 LC
Mode Diagnosis content

I Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive will not be diagnosed when no EC

map DVD-ROM is in it.)
Self-diagnosis
I Performs diagnosis of connections between C/U and GPS antenna and
between C/U and all units. FE
Color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a
Display
color bar and a gray scale.
CL
The following signals can be diagnosed: vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle signals
light, IGN (IGN SW), and reverse.

Displays the navigation system-related problems that occurred in the past

MT
History of Errors and the number of their occurrence. When a trouble symptom is selected,
the time and place of the latest occurrence will be shown.
AT
All A/C screen displays on LCD monitor and the A/C SW indicator lamp
Auto Climate Control
are illuminated.
Confirmation/
adjustment Display Longitude & Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude
AX
Latitude will be displayed.

Angle adjustment
Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning SU
angle of the car mark on the display.
Navigation
Corrects difference between the current-location mark on the display and
Distance adjustment
actual position of the vehicle. BR
Location memorized by AV and NAVI control unit can be initialized in this
Initialize Location
mode. ST
Service Service schedule can be changed in this mode.

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-457
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Mode

Self-Diagnosis Mode =NJEL0603

OPERATION PROCEDURE NJEL0603S01
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system off.
3. While pressing the “INFO” switch, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the
self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
I Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by
pressing “BACK” switch.
YEL832D

4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items

“SELF-DIAGNOSIS” and “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
will become selective.

SKIA0381E

5. Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the “SELF-DIAGNOSIS”.

I Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the opera-
tion enters the self-diagnosis mode.
I A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision screen
indicates progress of the diagnosis.

SKIA0382E

6. When the self-diagnosis completes, optional part confirmation

screen will be shown.
I When connection of an optional part is judged faulty, a screen
to check if the optional part is actually fitted on the vehicle or
not will be shown. When fitted, select the switch of the part on
the screen and press “END”. Then the “Self-diagnosis” screen
will be shown.
I When the optional part is connected normally, the switch for
the part will not appear on the screen.

SKIA1403E

7. On the “Self-diagnosis” screen, each unit name will be colored

according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green: No malfunctioning.
Yellow: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
Red: Unit is malfunctioning.
Gray: Diagnosis has not been done.
I If several malfunctions are present in a unit, color of its switch
on the screen will be either red, yellow, or gray, determined by
the malfunction of the highest priority.

SKIA1404E

EL-458
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
8. Select a switch on the “Self-diagnosis” screen and comments
for the diagnosis results will be shown.
I When the switch is green, the following comment will be GI
shown. “Self-diagnosis was successful. Further diagnosis and
adjustments are recommended. Follow the “confirmation and
adjustments” menu or refer to the service manual”. MA
I When the switch is yellow, the following comment will be
shown. “Connection to the following unit is abnormal. See the
service manual for further details”. EM
I When the switch is red, the following comment will be shown.
“Center Control Unit is abnormal”.
SKIA1516E LC
I When the switch is gray, the following comment will be shown.
“Self-diagnosis for DVD-ROM DRIVER of NAVI was not con-
ducted because no DVD-ROM was available”. EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-459
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSIS CHART =NJEL0603S02
1. Find applicable diagnosis number from chart.
2. Find possible causes from diagnosis number chart. Perform
check with Wiring Diagram — COMM —.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, then perform self-diagnosis again.
Screen switch
Diagnosis No.
Switch color Control unit Display Audio unit CD auto changer GPS antenna

Red × Diagnosis 1

Gray × Diagnosis 2

× Diagnosis 3

× Diagnosis 4

× × Diagnosis 5
Yellow
× × × Diagnosis 6

× Diagnosis 7

× × Diagnosis 8

CAUTION:
If multifunction switch is malfunctioning, self-diagnosis mode
cannot be started.
DIAGNOSIS NUMBER CHART NJEL0603S03

Diagnosis No. Possible causes

Diagnosis 1 Control unit (AV and NAVI C/U) is malfunctioning.

Diagnosis 2 AV and NAVI C/U determines that no map DVD-ROM is inserted.

If “DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. Check disc.” is displayed:

1. Remove inserted map DVD-ROM and check that it is correct special DVD-ROM.
2. Check that there is no dirt, damage, or warping on removed DVD-ROM.
Diagnosis 3
3. If above checks reveal nothing unusual, insert another map DVD-ROM with same contents. Then check
whether same diagnosis result is obtained when “Self-diagnosis” is performed. If result is same, AV and NAVI
C/U is malfunctioning. If not same, map DVD-ROM should be replaced.

“DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in C/U is malfunctioning. Follow maintenance procedures to diagnose.” is dis-
Diagnosis 4
played: Perform check as described in Diagnosis 3.

I Display power supply or ground line

Diagnosis 5
I AV communication line between Display and multifunction switch

Diagnosis 6 Audio unit power supply or ground line

Diagnosis 7 CD auto changer power supply and ground circuit, Communication line between CD auto changer and audio unit

GPS antenna system

1. Visually check for open circuit in GPS antenna coaxial cable.
Diagnosis 8 2. Disconnect GPS antenna connector and check AV and NAVI C/U outputs approx. 5V. If there is no voltage,
AV and NAVI C/U is malfunctioning. If there is, replace GPS antenna. If connection is inoperative after per-
forming self-diagnosis again, AV and NAVI C/U is malfunctioning.

EL-460
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode

Confirmation/Adjustment Mode NJEL0604

OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
NJEL0604S01
GI
2. Turn the audio system off.
3. While pressing the “INFO” switch, turn the volume control dial MA
clockwise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. (When the
self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
I Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed by EM
pressing “BACK” switch.
YEL832D LC
4. The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items
“SELF-DIAGNOSIS” and “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT”
will become selective. EC

FE

CL

SKIA0381E
MT
5. When “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” is selected on the
initial trouble diagnosis screen, the operation will enter the AT
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check
and adjustment of each item will become possible.
6. Select each switch on “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” AX
screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.

SU

BR
SKIA1405E

DISPLAY NJEL0604S02 ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

SKIA0362E

I When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of

EL-461
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error: Screen looks bluish
G (green) signal error: Screen looks yellowish
B (blue) signal error: Screen looks reddish
I When the color of the screen looks unusual, EL-477, Color of
RGB Image Is Not Proper.

VEHICLE SIGNALS NJEL0604S03

I A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle sig-
nal and the signals recognized by the system.

SKIA1406E

Diagnosis item Display Condition Remarks

ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Changes in indication may be delayed by
Vehicle speed OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
— Ignition switch in ACC position

ON Lighting switch ON
Lights —
OFF Lighting switch OFF

ON Ignition switch ON
IGN —
OFF Ignition switch ACC or OFF

ON Selector lever in R-position

Changes in indication may be delayed by
Reverse OFF Selector lever in other than R-position
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
— Ignition switch in ACC position

I If vehicle speed is NG, EL-471, “Vehicle Speed Signal Check”.

I If light is NG, EL-472, “Illumination Control Signal Check”.
I If IGN is NG, EL-473, “Ignition signal Check”.
I If reverse is NG, EL-474, “Reverse Signal Check”.

NAVIGATION NJEL0604S04
Display Longitude & Latitude NJEL0604S0401
I Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch “Set”.

SKIA1616E

EL-462
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
I The longitude and latitude are displayed.

GI

MA

EM

SKIA1617E LC
Angle Adjustment NJEL0604S0402
I Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope. EC

FE

CL

SKIA1517E
MT
Speed Calibration NJEL0604S0403
I During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and AT
tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the auto-
matic distance correction function. This function, on the other
hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving AX
with tire chain fitted on tires.
SU

BR
SKIA0365E

Initialize Location
Description
NJEL0604S0404 ST
I Location data for GPS in the Center control unit is initialized in
Europe by this mode. Then it is possible for Center control unit RS
to receive GPS signals for short time.

BT

HA

How to perform “Initialize location” mode SC

1. Select “Initialize Location”, and push “ENTER”.

IDX

SKIA1618E

EL-463
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
2. A message “Please wait.” is displayed and then backs to
another display of “Confirmation/Adjustment” mode.
NOTE:
I To continue GPS initialized operation, operate as follows back
to “Map” screen.
− Push “BACK” button twice.
− Push “MAP” button.
I After above operation, GPS indicator changes to green color
within half a minute, unless improper GPS located condition.
I This operation should be performed in outside field.
SKIA1619E
HISTORY OF ERRORS NJEL0604S05

SKIA1518E

DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS NJEL0604S06

The “Self-diagnosis” results indicate whether an error occurred dur-
ing the period from when the ignition switch is turned to ON until
“Self-diagnosis” is completed.
If an error occurred before the ignition switch was turned to ON and
does not occur again until the “Self-diagnosis” is completed, the
diagnosis result will be judged normal. Therefore, those errors in
the past, which cannot be found by the “Self-diagnosis,” must be
found by diagnosing the “History of Errors”.
The History of Errors displays the time and place of the most recent
occurrence of that error. However, take note of the following points.
I Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed
when the GPS antenna substrate within the AV and NAVI con-
trol unit has malfunctioned.
I Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of
the current-location mark at the time when the error occurred.
If the current-location mark has deviated from the correct
position, then the place of the error occurrence max be located
correctly.
I The maximum number of occurrences which can be stored is
50. For the 51st and later occurrences, the displayed number
remains 50.
When a reproducible malfunction occurred but its cause cannot be
identified because several errors are present, record the item, num-
ber and place (longitude/latitude) of error occurrence (or delete the

EL-464
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
History of Errors), then turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON to
reproduce the malfunction. Check the History of Errors to find the
items which show an increased number of occurrences, and diag- GI
nose the item.
Possible causes
Error item Example of symptom MA
Action/symptom

Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and EM

internal gyro
I Navigation location detection performance
Gyro sensor I Perform the self-diagnosis.
has deteriorated.
disconnected I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-
(Angular velocity cannot be detected.) LC
diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong
radio interference.

Communication error between AV and NAVI control unit and

EC
internal GPS substrate I Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
GPS discon- I Perform the self-diagnosis. (Location correction using GPS is not per- FE
nected I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self- formed.)
diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong I GPS receiving status remains gray.
radio interference. CL
Malfunctioning transmission wires to AV and NAVI control unit
and internal GPS substrate
GPS trans- MT
I During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not
mission cable I Perform the self-diagnosis.
I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self- performed.
malfunction
diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong AT
radio interference.

Malfunctioning receiving wires to AV and NAVI control unit and

internal GPS substrate I Navigation location detection performance AX
GPS input has deteriorated.
line connec- I Perform the self-diagnosis. (Location correction using GPS is not per-
tion error I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self- formed.) SU
diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong I GPS receiving status remains gray.
radio interference.

Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchroniz- BR

ing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification I Navigation location detection performance
GPS TCX0
I Perform the self-diagnosis. has deteriorated.
over
(Location correction using GPS is not per- ST
GPS TCX0 I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-
diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong formed.)
under
radio interference, or the control unit may have been sub- I GPS receiving status remains gray.
jected to excessively high or low temperatures.
RS
Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning. I Location detection accuracy of the navigation
GPS ROM system will deteriorate, depending on the BT
malfunction I Perform the self-diagnosis. failed area in the memory, because GPS
GPS RAM I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self- cannot make correct positioning.
malfunction diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong (Location correction using GPS is not per- HA
radio interference. formed.)

I Correct time may not be displayed.

Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning. I After the power is turned on, the system SC
always takes some time until GPS position-
ing becomes possible. (The GPS receiver
GPS RTC
malfunction I Perform the self-diagnosis. starts positioning without re-collecting the
I When the AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self- whole satellite information when it judged the
diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong data stored in the receiver is correct.)
radio interference. I Correct time of error occurrence may not be IDX
stored in the “History of Errors”.

EL-465
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)

Possible causes
Error item Example of symptom
Action/symptom

Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in AV and

NAVI control unit and GPS antenna. I Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
GPS antenna I Perform the self-diagnosis.
(Location correction using GPS is not per-
disconnected I When connection between AV and NAVI control unit and GPS
formed.)
antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may I GPS receiving status remains gray.
be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.

The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has

decreased. I Navigation location detection performance
has deteriorated.
Low voltage I Perform the self-diagnosis. (Location correction using GPS is not per-
of GPS I When connection between AV and NAVI control unit and GPS formed.)
antenna is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may I GPS receiving status remains gray.
be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.

Malfunctioning AV and NAVI control unit -

Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot

DVD-ROM
be read. I The map of a particular location cannot be
Malfunction
DVD-ROM I Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty? displayed.
Read error – If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning. I Specific guidance information cannot be dis-
DVD-ROM – If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth. played.
Response I Perform the self-diagnosis. I Map display is slow.
Error I When AV and NAVI control unit is judged normal by self- I Guidance information display is slow.
diagnosis, the symptom is judged intermittent, caused by I System has been affected by vibration.
vibration.

AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL NJEL0604S07

I “ATC Automatic Air Conditioner” ATC-42, “Self-diagnosis Func-
tion” for the details.

SERVICE NJEL0604S08
I To set Service schedule, change Journey distance with joy-
stick. At the same time, the marker of journey distance will be
moved.

SKIA1621E

I To reset to initial distance, select “Reset” and push “ENTER”.

I When the indicator of “Service Information Display” is set
green, the color of the journey distance marker will be red. And
automatically Service information screen will be displayed
when journey distance is reached on service schedule.

SKIA1622E

EL-466
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check

Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check NJEL0605

1 CHECK FUSE GI
Check that the following fuses of the AV and NAVI control unit are not blown.

MA

EM

LC
MTBL1516

OK or NG
EC
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate case of problem before installing new fuse. EL-12,
“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”. FE

2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK CL

1. Disconnect the AV and NAVI control unit connector.
2. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.
MT

AT

AX

SU
SKIA1407E
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA
MTBL1517
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check harness for open or short between AV and NAVI control unit and fuse.

IDX

EL-467
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Cont’d)

3 GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK.

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

SKIA1408E
2. Check continuity between the following AV and NAVI control unit harness connector M95 1 (B), 4 (B), 5 (BR) and
ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © Repair or replace harness.

EL-468
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Check Display Unit, Multifunction Switch Power, and Ground Circuit

Check Display Unit, Multifunction Switch

Power, and Ground Circuit =NJEL0606
GI
1 CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses at display unit along with multifunction switch fuses listed below.
MA

EM

LC
MTBL1518

OK or NG
EC
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace the fuse.
FE
2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION
1. Disconnect display unit or multifunction switch connector.
CL
2. Check voltage between as following unit and ground.
MT

AT

AX

SU
MKIB0259E

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

MTBL1519
SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace display unit or multifunction switch power circuit harness.

IDX

EL-469
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Check Display Unit, Multifunction Switch Power, and Ground Circuit (Cont’d)

3 GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check continuity between display unit or multifunction switch and ground.

SKIA1409E

MTBL1520

OK or NG
OK © Normal.
NG © Replace ground circuit harness of display unit or multifunction switch.

EL-470
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check

Vehicle Speed Signal Check NJEL0607

1 HARNESS CHECK GI
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV and NAVI control unit connector and combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity AV and NAVI control unit and combination meter. MA

EM

LC

EC

YEL843D FE

CL

MT
MTBL1521
4. Check continuity AV and NAVI control unit harness connector terminal 33 (L/B) and ground. AT
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. SU

2 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK 1 BR

1. Connect AV and NAVI control unit connector and combination meter connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit harness connector M96 terminal 33 (L/B) and ground. ST
Approx. 3.5 V or more.

RS

BT

HA

SC
SKIA1411E

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
IDX

EL-471
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check (Cont’d)

3 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK 2

1. Connect combination meter connector.
2. While driving vehicle at a constant speed.

SKIA1411E
3. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit and ground with oscilloscope or CONSULT-ll.
33 (L/B)-ground:
EL-450, “Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit”
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check combination meter system. EL-117, “Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis”.

Illumination Control Signal Check NJEL0608

1 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SIGNAL CHECK

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.

SKIA1412E

MTBL1522

OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between AV and NAVI control unit and combination
switch.

EL-472
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Ignition Signal Check

Ignition Signal Check NJEL0609

1 IGNITION SIGNAL CHECK GI

1. Disconnect the AV and NAVI control unit connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit and ground. MA

EM

LC

EC

SKIA1413E FE

CL

MT

AT
MTBL1523

OK or NG
AX
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between AV and NAVI control unit and fuse.
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-473
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Reverse Signal Check

Reverse Signal Check =NJEL0610

1 REVERSE LAMP CHECK

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. A/T Shift selector lever into R-position. Does “R” in the shift position indicator come on?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check park/neutral position relay system. AT-408, “Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch
Adjustment”.

2 REVERSE SIGNAL CHECK

1. With the selector lever in R-position.
2. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.

SKIA1414E

MTBL1524

OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short between AV and NAVI control unit and park/neutral
position relay.

EL-474
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
RGB Screen Is Not Shown

RGB Screen Is Not Shown NJEL0611

1 HARNESS CHECK GI
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Display connector.
3. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and Display. MA

EM

LC

EC

SKIA1415E FE

CL

MT

AT
MTBL1525
4. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.
AX

SU

MTBL1526
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. ST
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-475
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
RGB Screen Is Not Shown (Cont’d)

2 HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL CHECK

1. Connect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Display connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit connector terminals 13 (BR) and 17 with oscilloscope or CON-
SULT-ll.

SKIA1416E
13 (BR)-17: EL-450, “Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit”
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace the display unit.

3 RGB AREA SIGNAL CHECK

1. Press “INFO” switch.
2. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit connector terminals 12 (R) and 17with oscilloscope or CON-
SULT-ll.

SKIA1417E
12 (R)-17: EL-450, “Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit”
OK or NG
OK © Replace the display unit.
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.

EL-476
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No Screens Appear

No Screens Appear =NJEL0612

1 CHECK SYMPTOM GI
Check possibility to operate air conditioning and audio unit by multifunction switch.
OK or NG MA
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © EL-497, “System Does Not Start”.
EM
2 DISPLAY UNIT POWER SYSTEM HARNESS CHECK
LC
Check voltage between Display unit and ground. EL-469, “Check Display Unit, Multifunction Switch Power, and Ground
Circuit”.
OK or NG EC
OK © Replace the display unit.
NG © Open or short in display unit power system harness. FE

CL

MT
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper NJEL0613
AT
1 COLOR BAR DIAGNOSIS CHECK
Check color tone by “SCREEN ADJUSTMENT” of CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT function.
AX
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END.
NG © GO TO 2.
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-477
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Cont’d)

2 HARNESS CHECK-1
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Display connector.
3. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and Display.
4. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.
I When the screen looks bluish

SKIA1418E

MTBL1527

MTBL1528

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.

EL-478
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Cont’d)

3 HARNESS CHECK-2
1. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground. GI
I When the screen looks reddish

MA

EM

LC

EC
SKIA1419E

FE

CL

MT
MTBL1529

AT

AX

MTBL1530 SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. BR
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-479
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Cont’d)

4 HARNESS CHECK-3
1. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.
I When the screen looks yellowish

SKIA1420E

MTBL1531

MTBL1532

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.

EL-480
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper (Cont’d)

5 RGB SIGNAL CHECK

1. Connect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Display connector. GI

MA

EM

LC

SKIA1421E EC
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Display “Color bar” by “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
4. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit terminals 18, 21, 24 and 17 with oscilloscope or CONSULT-ll. FE
I When the screen looks bluish

CL

MT

MTBL1533 AT
I When the screen looks reddish

AX

SU

BR
MTBL1534
I When the screen looks yellowish
ST

RS

BT
MTBL1535

OK or NG HA
OK © Replace the display unit.
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit. SC

IDX

EL-481
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
RGB Screen Is Rolling

RGB Screen Is Rolling NJEL0614

1 COLOR BAR DIAGNOSIS CHECK

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Display connector.
3. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and Display.

SKIA1422E

MTBL1536
4. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.

MTBL1537

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © I Check harness for open or short between AV and NAVI control unit and Display for
open or short circuit.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.

EL-482
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
RGB Screen Is Rolling (Cont’d)

2 RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK

1. Connect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Display connector. GI
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit terminals 15 and 17.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SKIA1423E
15 (G)-17: EL-450 , “Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit” FE
OK or NG
OK © Replace the display unit.
CL
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-483
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Sound Is Not Heard

Guide Sound Is Not Heard =NJEL0615

1 CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING

I While driving in the dark pink route, voice guide does not operate. (note)
I Is volume setting not switched ON?
NOTE:
Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by I on the map). Therefore, guid-
ance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction.
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up.

2 HARNESS CHECK
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Audio unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and Audio unit.

YEL844D

MTBL1538
4. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.

MTBL1539

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.

EL-484
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Sound Is Not Heard (Cont’d)

3 VOICE GUIDE CHECK

1. Connect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Audio unit connector. GI
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit terminals 8 and 7.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SKIA1425E

FE

CL

MT

MTBL1540
AT
OK or NG
OK © Replace Audio unit.
AX
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.

SU

BR

Multifunction Switch Controls Are Ineffective ST

(Rear Defogger Control Excluded) NJEL0616

1 CHECK POWER AND GROUND SYSTEMS

RS
Check voltage between multifunction switch and ground. EL-469, “Check Display Unit, Multifunction Switch Power, and
Ground Circuit”.
OK or NG
BT
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Malfunction of multifunction switch ACC power or ground harness HA

2 CHECK SYMPTOM SC
Turn ignition switch to ACC position. Is screen changed to audio control screen when CD is inserted?
Switches. © GO TO 3.
Does not switch. © GO TO 5.

IDX

EL-485
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Multifunction Switch Controls Are Ineffective (Rear Defogger Control Excluded) (Cont’d)

3 HARNESS CHECK
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and Audio unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch and Audio unit.

YEL845D

MTBL1541
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector M97 terminals 11 (L), 13 (P) and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © I Replace harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.

4 COMMUNICATION SIGNAL INSPECTION

1. Connect multifunction switch and Audio unit connectors.

SKIA1427E
2. Check voltage signal between multifunction switch harness connector M97 terminals 11 (L), 13 (P) and ground.
11 (L), 13 (P) - ground:
EL-456, “Terminals and Reference Value for Multifunction Switch”
OK or NG
OK © Replace audio unit.
NG © Replace multifunction switch.

EL-486
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Multifunction Switch Controls Are Ineffective (Rear Defogger Control Excluded) (Cont’d)

5 HARNESS CHECK
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. GI

MA

EM

LC

SKIA1428E EC
2. Disconnect AV and NAVI control unit connector and Audio unit connector.
3. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and Audio unit.
FE

CL

MT

AT
MTBL1542
4. Check continuity between terminals 47, 48 and 46.
AX

SU

BR

ST
SKIA1429E
RS

BT

HA
MTBL1543

OK or NG SC
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © I Replace harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.

IDX

EL-487
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Multifunction Switch Controls Are Ineffective (Rear Defogger Control Excluded) (Cont’d)

6 COMMUNICATION SIGNAL INSPECTION

1. Connect audio unit to AV and NAVI control unit connector.

SKIA1430E
2. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit terminals 47 (R), 48 (G) and ground.
47 (R), 48 (G)-ground:
EL-450, “Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit”
OK or NG
OK © Replace audio unit.
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.

EL-488
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Air Conditioning Controls (Only) Are Ineffective (Rear Defogger Control Excluded)

Air Conditioning Controls (Only) Are Ineffective

(Rear Defogger Control Excluded) NJEL0617
GI
1 HARNESS CHECK
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector and AV and NAVI control unit connector.
MA
3. Check continuity between A/C auto amp. and AV and NAVI control unit.
EM

LC

EC

FE
SKIA1431E

CL

MT

AT

AX
MTBL1544
4. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.
SU

BR

MTBL1545 ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. RS
NG © I Check harness between A/C auto amp. and AV and NAVI control unit.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-489
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Air Conditioning Controls (Only) Are Ineffective (Rear Defogger Control Excluded) (Cont’d)

2 A/C–AV, AV–AC, AC–CLK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CHECK

1. Connect A/C AUTO AMP. connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.

SKIA1432E

MTBL1546

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Replace harness.
I Replace A/C AUTO AMP.

3 A/C - AV, AV - AC, AC - CLK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CHECK

1. Connect AV and NAVI control unit connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit terminals 43, 44, 45 and ground.

SKIA1432E

MTBL1547

OK or NG
OK © Replace A/C auto amplifier.
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.

EL-490
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Rear Defogger Does Not Operate

Rear Defogger Does Not Operate NJEL0618

1 HARNESS INSPECTION GI
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

MA

EM

LC

EC
SKIA1434E
2. Disconnect multifunction switch connector and smart entrance control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector M97 terminal 9 (G/B) and smart entrance control unit FE
harness connector M193 terminal 22 (G/B).
Continuity should exist.
4. Check continuity between multifunction switch harness connector M97 terminal 9 (G/B) and ground. CL
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
MT
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair harness.
AT
2 CHECK REAR DEFOGGER ON SIGNAL
1. Connect multifunction switch connector and smart entrance control unit connector.
AX
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check continuity between multifunction switch and ground when rear defogger switch is operated.
SU

BR

ST

RS

SKIA1435E
BT

HA

SC

MTBL1548

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
IDX
NG © Replace multifunction switch.

EL-491
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Rear Defogger Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate

Rear Defogger Indicator Lamp Does Not

Illuminate NJEL0619

1 CHECK POSITION OF IGNITION SWITCH

Is ignition switch ON?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Rear defogger does not operate if ignition switch is not ON.

2 CHECK OPERATION OF REAR DEFOGGER

Does rear defogger operate when rear defogger switch is turned ON? (Does fogging disappear?)
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Check rear defogger system. Refer to EL-183, “Rear Defogger Does Not Operate”.

3 CHECK REAR DEFOGGER INDICATOR LAMP SIGNALS

1. Disconnect multifunction switch connector.
2. Check voltage between multifunction switch terminal 10 (L/R) and ground.

SKIA1433E
Battery voltage should exist.
OK or NG
OK © Replace multifunction switch.
NG © Check harness for open or short between multifunction switch and rear defogger relay.

EL-492
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No Fuel Information Is Displayed/No Warning Message Is Displayed

No Fuel Information Is Displayed/No Warning

Message Is Displayed NJEL0620
GI
1 CHECK DISPLAY CONDITIONS
Check display conditions for all warning screens.
MA

EM

LC
MTBL1549

© GO TO 2.
EC
2 HARNESS CHECK
FE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect connectors of combination meter and AV and NAVI control unit.
3. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and combination meter.
CL

MT

AT

AX

YEL846D
SU

BR

ST

MTBL1550
RS
4. Check continuity between AV and NAVI control unit and ground.
BT

HA

MTBL1551 SC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Repair harness.
I Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
IDX

EL-493
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
No Fuel Information Is Displayed/No Warning Message Is Displayed (Cont’d)

3 COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (AV–ME) CHECK

1. Connect connectors of combination meter and AV and NAVI control unit.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit terminal 34 and ground.

SKIA1437E

MTBL1552

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.

4 COMMUNICATION SIGNAL (ME–AV) CHECK

1. Turn ignition switch to ON and display “VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS” screen.
2. Check voltage signal between AV and NAVI control unit harness connector M96 terminal 35 (G) and ground.

SKIA1438E
35 (G)- ground:
EL-450, “Terminals and Reference Value for AV and NAVI Control Unit”
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check combination meter system. EL-339, “Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis”.

EL-494
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Previous Conditions Are Not Stored

Previous Conditions Are Not Stored NJEL0621

1 BATTERY POWER CHECK GI

I Check AV and NAVI control unit battery power.
Refer to EL-467, “Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check”.
MA
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check AV and NAVI control unit battery power system harness.
EM

LC
The Position of The Current-Location Mark Is
Not Correct NJEL0622
EC
1 SELF-DIAGNOSIS
I “Self-diagnosis mode” of the self-diagnosis function EL-458, “Self-Diagnosis Mode”. FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. CL
NG © Check the applicable parts.

MT
2 HISTORY OF ERRORS DIAGNOSIS
I Was any error stored in EL-464, “HISTORY OF ERRORS” of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode?
AT
Yes or No
Yes © EL-464, “DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS”.
AX
No © EL-499, “Driving Test”.

SU

BR

Radio Wave From The GPS Satellite Is Not ST

Received NJEL0623

1 ENVIRONMENT CHECK
RS
I Check if any metal object that intercepts radio waves or an object that emits radio waves (such as a portable phone) is
located near the GPS antenna. Check if the vehicle is shielded by a building.
OK or NG
BT
OK © I System is normal.
The GPS antenna may not be able to receive radio waves from the GPS satellite if it HA
is shielded by metal object or an object emitting radio waves is placed near it.
NG © GO TO 2.
SC
2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS
I Refer to EL-458, “Self-Diagnosis Mode”.
OK or NG
OK © Replace GPS antenna. IDX
NG © Check the applicable parts.

EL-495
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Display Does Not Change When Screen Adjustment Is Performed

Display Does Not Change When Screen

Adjustment Is Performed NJEL0624

1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Do other systems operate properly?
Do operate. © Replace the display unit.
Do not operate. © Check the problem again.

Day/Night Display Switching Is Not Done. Night

Illumination for AV and NAVI Control Unit Does
Not Illuminate NJEL0625

1 VEHICLE SIGNAL CHECK

1. Start the engine.
2. Diagnose the following items with EL-462, “VEHICLE SIGNALS” in CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode.
<Lamp signals>
Lighting switch position 1: ON
Lighting switch OFF: OFF
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © EL-472, “Illumination Control Signal Check”.

On Multifunction Switch, a Specific Switch

Does Not Operate in All Conditions NJEL0626

1
Replace multifunction switch.
©

Driving Information Is Inaccurate. Maintenance

Information Is Inaccurate NJEL0627

1 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL INSPECTION

Check vehicle speed signal. EL-471, “Vehicle Speed Signal Check”.
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Check combination meter system. EL-339, “Combination Meter Self-Diagnosis”

EL-496
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Does Not Start

System Does Not Start NJEL0628

1 INSPECT POWER SYSTEM GI

Inspect power system of AV and NAVI control unit. EL-467 , “Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check”.
OK or NG MA
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © Malfunction in power system of AV and NAVI control unit
EM

LC
The Current Position Mark Is in the Wrong
Place NJEL0629
EC
1 INSPECT POWER SYSTEM.
I EL-500, “Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal?” FE
Yes or No
Yes © The limit of the navigation location detection capability has been reached. CL
No © GO TO 2.

MT
2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS
I Perform EL-458 , “Self-Diagnosis Mode”.
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
AX
NG © Check the applicable parts.

3 ERROR RECORD DIAGNOSIS

SU
I Is there an error listed in EL-464, “HISTORY OF ERRORS” in “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode?
Yes or No
BR
Yes © EL-464, “DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS”.
No © GO TO 4. ST

4 VEHICLE SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS RS

I Start the engine.
I Diagnose the following items with EL-462, “VEHICLE SIGNALS” in “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
<Vehicle speed signal> BT
Vehicle running: ON
While the vehicle is stopped: OFF
<Reverse signal> HA
Selector lever in R-position: ON
Selector lever in other than R-position: OFF
SC
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © I If vehicle speed is NG, proceed to EL-471, “Vehicle Speed Signal Check”.
I If reverse is NG, proceed to EL-474, “Reverse Signal Check”.
IDX

EL-497
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Current-Location Mark Will Not Move Forward/Backward

The Current-Location Mark Will Not Move

Forward/Backward NJEL0630

1 VEHICLE SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS

I Start the engine.
I Diagnose the following items with EL-462, “VEHICLE SIGNALS” in “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode.
<Vehicle speed signal>
Vehicle running: ON
While the vehicle is stopped: OFF
<Reverse signal>
Selector lever in R-position: ON
Selector lever in other than R-position: OFF
OK or NG
OK © Replace AV and NAVI control unit.
NG © I If vehicle speed is NG, proceed to EL-471, “Vehicle Speed Signal Check”.
I If reverse is NG, proceed to EL-474, “Reverse Signal Check”.

The Position of the Current-Location Mark Is

Not Correct NJEL0631
Inspection procedure
1 SELF-DIAGNOSIS
I EL-461, “Operation Procedure” in “Self-Diagnosis Mode.”
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the applicable parts.

2 ERROR RECORD DIAGNOSIS

I Is there an error listed in EL-464, “HISTORY OF ERRORS” in “CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT” mode?
Is there an error history?
Yes © EL-464, “DIAGNOSIS BY HISTORY OF ERRORS”.
No © EL-499, “Driving Test”

EL-498
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Driving Test

Driving Test NJEL0632

1 DRIVING TEST 1 GI
1. Scroll the map screen to display the area to make correction. Press “ENTER” and select “CURRENT LOCATION COR-
RECTION”.
2. Correct direction of the vehicle mark. MA
3. Perform the distance correction of the CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode.
NOTE:
Normally, adjustment is not necessary because this system has automatic distance correction function. However, when EM
a tire chain is fitted, adjustment in accordance with the tire diameter ratio must be made.
4. Are symptoms applicable to the EL-500, “Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal” present after driving the
vehicle? LC
Yes or No
Yes © Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system EC
No © GO TO 2.

FE
2 DRIVING TEST 2
I Did any problem occur when the proper test in the following test patterns is performed?
I Test pattern
CL
Driving test finds the difference between the symptoms monitored with and without each sensor.
– Test pattern 1: Test method with no GPS location correction
Disconnect the GPS antenna connector connected to the AV and NAVI control unit. Accurately adjust the current posi- MT
tion and the direction, then drive the vehicle.
– Test pattern 2: Test method with no map-matching
Accurately adjust the current position and the direction. Eject the map DVD-ROM from the AV and NAVI control unit AT
with the ignition switch turned to OFF, then drive the vehicle. After driving, insert the map DVD-ROM back in the unit,
display the track of the vehicle on the map screen and compare it with the actual road configuration.
I Sample tests AX
– <To determine if the current-location mark skips at the same position, if so, whether it is caused by map-matching or
by GPS>
Perform test pattern 1. SU
– <To determine if the pattern of streets displayed is correct or not>
Perform test pattern 1 & 2.
Compare the track of the vehicle on the map screen and the actual road configuration. For fairly accurate tracking, BR
plotting shall be made every several hundred meters.
– <When the distance is adjusted accurately>
Perform test pattern 1 & 2. ST
Drive on a road of which distance is accurately known (by utilizing distance posts on a highway). Calculate the rate of
change (increased/decreased) of the distance by comparing with the actual distance.
Correction = A/B RS
A: Distance shown on the screen
B: Actual distance
Yes or No BT
Yes © I If adjustment is insufficient, perform adjustment again.
I If any error is found in the map, please let us know. HA
I Replace AV and NAVI control unit
No © Limit of the location detection capacity of the navigation system
SC

IDX

EL-499
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal

Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal NJEL0633

BASIC OPERATION NJEL0633S01

Symptom Cause Remedy

No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to Adjust the display brightness.
DARK side.

No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
too high. Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle System is not malfunction.
is driving on a dark pink route.

Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.

Small black or bright spots Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display. System is not malfunction.
appear on the screen.

VEHICLE MARK NJEL0633S02

Symptom Cause Remedy

Map screen and BIRDVIEWT Some thinning of the character data is done to System is not malfunction.
Name of the place vary with the prevent the display becoming to complex. In
screen. some cases and in some locations, the display
contents may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may
not be displayed every time on account of the
data processing.

Vehicle mark is not positioned Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
correctly. its ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition.

Screen will not switch to night- The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
time mode after the lighting SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
switch is turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen
may be inhibited by the automatic illumination
adjustment function.

Map screen will not scroll in Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” switch to display the current
accordance with the vehicle location.
travel.

Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” switch to display the current
location.

Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays vehicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS signal cannot be received because some- Do not place anything on driver’s side
thing is placed on driver’s side instrument panel. instrument panel.

GPS satellites are located badly. Wait until the location becomes better.

Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.

Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h(19 MPH)] and
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is the deviation will be automatically adjusted.
fitted or the system has been used on another If advancement or retard still occur, perform
vehicle. the distance adjustment by
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode of
diagnosis function.

Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will
always deviated to the same position.) be released once a year.

EL-500
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
DESTINATION, PASSING POINTS, AND MENU ITEMS CANNOT BE SELECTED/SET NJEL0633S03

Symptom Cause Remedy GI

Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.

Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing To include the passing points that have MA
when re-searching the route. point, or the system judged so. been passed into the route again, set the
route again.

Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route EM
played. searching.

Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route. LC
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn the route guide ON.

Route information is not available on the dark System is not malfunction. EC

pink route.

After the route searching, no Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
guide sign will appear as the (On the display, only guide signs related to the
FE
vehicle goes near the entrance/ recommended route will be shown.)
exit to the toll road.
CL
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or Drive on a road to be searched. Or
possible. no recommended route is available. re-search the route manually. In this case,
however, the whole route will be searched. MT
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every conditions consid- System is not malfunction.
search (or detour search). ered. However, the result is the same as that of
However, the result is the same the previous search. AT
as that of the previous search.

Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To AX
stop at more than five points, perform shar-
ing in several steps.

When setting the route, the start- The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunction. SU
ing point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.

Some menu items cannot be The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then
selected. operate the system.
BR

VOICE GUIDE NJEL0633S04 ST

Symptom Cause Remedy

Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersec- System is not malfunction. RS
tions that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by
I on the map). Therefore, guidance may not be
given even when the route on the map changes BT
direction.

The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route. HA
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn the voice guide ON.

Route guide is turned OFF. Turn the route guide ON.

SC
Voice guide does not match the Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic
actual road pattern. the vehicle is turn and the connection of the road rules.
to other roads.

IDX

EL-501
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
ROUTE SEARCHING NJEL0633S05

Symptom Cause Remedy

No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the Find wider road (orange road or wider)
destination. nearby and reset the destination and pass-
ing points onto it. Take care of the traveling
direction when there are separate up and
down roads.

Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.

Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
current position or the destination. search conditions OFF.

Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunction.
used for the search Therefore, the route to the
current position or the passing points may be
intermittent.

When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each System is not malfunction.
recommended route, it is deleted section. When the vehicle has passed the pass-
from the screen. ing point 1, then the map data from the starting
point up to the passing point 1 will be deleted.
(The data may remain undeleted in some area.)

Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. Therefore, detour route route).
may be recommended.

A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the destination, or set the passing point on the
area around the starting point or the destina- route of your choice.
tion.

In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunction.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current position and the destination (pass-
ing points). For this reason, the recommended
route may be detouring.

Landmarks on the map do not This can happen due to omission or error in the As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will
match the actual ones. map data. be released once a year. Wait until the lat-
est map has become available.

Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination Reset the destination onto the road nearby.
the starting point, passing points, of the route guide were set far from the desired If this road is one of the highways (gray
and destination. points because route searching data around routes), an ordinary road nearby may be
these area were not stored. displayed as the recommended route.

EL-502
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
EXAMPLES OF CURRENT-LOCATION MARK DISPLACEMENT =NJEL0633S06
Vehicle’s travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle’s current location display. If correct location GI
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU
SEL698V

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-503
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Cause (condition) -:While driving ooo:Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)

Y-intersections

At a Y intersection or similar gradual

division of roads, error the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may
result in the current-location mark
appearing on the wrong road.

ELK0192D

Spiral roads

When driving on a large, continuous

spiral road (such as loop bridge), turn-
ing angle error is accumulated and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct location.

ELK0193D

Straight roads
When driving on a long, straight road
and slow curve without stopping, map-
matching does not work effectively
enough and distance errors may accu-
mulate. As a result, the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location
when the vehicle turned at a corner. If after travelling about 10 km (6
ELK0194D miles) the correct location has not
Road con-
been restored, perform location
figuration Zigzag roads correction and, if necessary,
direction correction.
When driving on a zigzag road, the
map may be matched to other roads in
the similar direction nearby at every
turn, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.

ELK0195D

Roads laid out in a grid pattern

When driving at where roads are laid
out in a grid pattern, where many
roads are running in the similar direc-
tion nearby, the map may be matched
to them by mistake and the vehicle
mark may deviate from the correct
location.
ELK0196D

Parallel roads

When two roads are running in parallel

(such as highway and sideway), the
map may be matched to the other
road by mistake and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.

ELK0197D

EL-504
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Cause (condition) -:While driving ooo:Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)

When driving in a parking lot, or other GI

In a parking lot location where there are no roads on
the map, matching may place the
vehicle mark on a nearby road. When MA
the vehicle returns to the road, the
vehicle mark may have deviated from
the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the
EM
steering wheel repeatedly, direction
errors accumulate, and the vehicle
SEL709V mark may deviate from the correct LC
location.

Turn table
When the ignition switch is OFF, the
EC
navigation system cannot get the sig-
nal from the gyroscope (angular speed
sensor). Therefore, the displayed FE
Place
direction may be wrong and the cor-
rect road may not be easily returned to
after rotating the vehicle on a turn CL
table with the ignition switch OFF.
SEL710V

On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other MT

roads where tires may slip easily,
Slippery roads accumulated mileage errors may If after travelling about 10 km (6
cause the vehicle mark to deviate from miles) the correct location has not AT
the correct road. been restored, perform location
correction and, if necessary,
When parking in sloped garages, direction correction. AX
when travelling on banked roads, or in
other cases where the vehicle turns
Slopes
when tilted, an error in the turning
angle will occur, and the vehicle mark SU
may deviate from the road.

Road not displayed on the map screen When driving on new roads or other BR
roads not displayed on the map
screen, map matching does not func-
tion correctly and matches the location ST
to a nearby road. When the vehicle
returns to a road which is on the map,
the vehicle mark may deviate from the RS
SEL699V
correct road.

Map data Different road pattern BT

(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map
data and the actual road pattern are
different, map matching does not func-
HA
tion correctly and matches the location
to a nearby road. The vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct road. SC
ELK0201D

Drive the vehicle for a while. If

When tire chains are used, the mile- the distance is still deviated,
age is not correctly detected, and the adjust it by using the distance
Vehicle Use of tire chains
vehicle mark may deviate from the adjustment function. (If the tire
IDX
correct road. chain is removed, recover the
original value.)

EL-505
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Cause (condition) -:While driving ooo:Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)

If the vehicle is driven off just after the

engine is started when the gyroscope
(angular speed sensor) correction is Wait for a short while before driv-
Just after the engine is started
not completed, the vehicle can lose its ing after starting the engine.
direction and may have deviated from
the correct location.

When driving long distances without

stopping, direction errors may
Precautions
Continuous driving without stopping accumulate, and the current-location Stop and adjust the orientation.
for driving
mark may deviate from the correct
road.

Spinning the wheels or engaging in

If after travelling about 10 km (6
other kinds of abusive driving may
miles) the correct location has not
result in the system being unable to
Abusive driving been restored, perform location
perform correct detection, and may
correction and, if necessary,
cause the vehicle mark to deviate from
direction correction.
the correct road.

Position correction accuracy

Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is
the screen with an accuracy of
poor, accuracy may be reduced when
approx. 1 MM.
the correct road cannot be found, par-
NOTE:
ticularly in places where there are
Whenever possible, use detailed
many roads.
map for the correction.
SEL699V
How to cor-
rect location Direction when location is corrected

If the accuracy of location settings dur-

ing correction is poor, accuracy may Perform direction correction.
be reduced afterwards.

SEL702V

THE CURRENT POSITION MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG.

NJEL0633S07
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear on completely different position in the map
depending on the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and
direction correction.
I When location correction has not been done
− If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the current-location mark becomes out of
place, it may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done.
The position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
I When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed
− Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when travelling with the ignition OFF, for
example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the pre-
cise location can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
THE CURRENT POSITION MARK JUMPS. NJEL0633S08
In the following cases, the current-location mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the
current location.
I When map matching has been done
− If the current location and the current-location mark are different when map matching is done, the current-
location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a
location which is not on a road.
I When GPS location correction has been done
− If the current location and the current-location mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS

EL-506
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
measurements, the current-location mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected”
to a location which is not on a road.
THE CURRENT LOCATION MARK IS IN A RIVER OR THE SEA. GI
NJEL0633S09
The navigation system moves the current location mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If
the location mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea. MA
WHEN DRIVING ON THE SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES THE CURRENT-LOCATION MARK IS IN
THE RIGHT PLACE AND SOMETIMES IT IS THE WRONG PLACE. NJEL0633S10 EM
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the LC
vehicle mark to deviate.
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP MATCHING IS SLOW.
I
NJEL0633S11
The map matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
EC
distance for the function to work.
I Because map matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar direc- FE
tions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected
until some special feature is found.
ALTHOUGH THE GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, THE VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT CL
RETURN TO THE CORRECT LOCATION. NJEL0633S12
I The GPS accuracy has an error of about 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the current-location mark may not MT
be on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done.
I The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-match-
ing location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used. AT
I GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped.
THE NAME OF THE CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED. NJEL0633S13
AX
The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen.
CONTENTS OF THE DISPLAY DIFFER FOR THE BIRDVIEWT AND THE (FLAT) MAP SU
SCREEN. NJEL0633S14
Difference of the BIRDVIEWT Screen From the Flat Map Screen Are as Follows. NJEL0633S1401
I The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel. BR
I The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
ST
I The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for
more distant areas.
I Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some cases RS
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
I The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-507
 NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading

Program Loading =NJEL0634

NOTE:
Program loading is operated when the version of soft is upgraded to the latest one, or when language is
switched.

SKIA1439E

EL-508
 CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description

System Description NJEL0535

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many GI
electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir- MA
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit EM
NJEL0536
Go to CAN system, when selecting your car model from the following table.
Body type Sedan/ 5DH/B/ 3DH/B LC
Axle 2WD

Engine QG18DE QG15DE/QG18DE EC

Transmission A/T M/T

Brake control ABS FE

CAN communication unit

ECM x x
CL
TCM x
MT
Smart entrance control unit x x

Data link connector x x

AT
Combination meter x x

CAN communication type Type 1 (EL-510) Type 2 (EL-511)

AX
CAN system trouble diagnosis Type 1 (EL-512) Type 2 (EL-530)

x: Applicable
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-509
 CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 1 =NJEL0536S01
System Diagram NJEL0536S0101

SEL825Y

Input/Output Signal Chart NJEL0536S0102

T: Transmit R: Receive

Smart entrance
Signals ECM TCM Combination meter
control unit

Engine speed signal T R

Brake switch signal R T

Rear window defogger signal R T

Heater fan switch signal R T

Air conditioner switch signal R T

MI signal T R

Current gear position signal T R

Engine coolant temperature signal T R

Fuel consumption signal T R

Vehicle speed signal R T

Seat belt reminder signal R T

Headlamp switch signal T R

Flashing indicator signal T R

Engine cooling fan speed signal T R

Child lock indicator signal T R

Door switches state signal T R

A/C compressor signal T R

Accelerator pedal position signal T R

Output shaft revolution signal R T

OD OFF switch signal R T

OD OFF indicator signal T R

A/T self-diagnosis signal R T

EL-510
 CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN Communication Unit (Cont’d)
TYPE 2 =NJEL0536S02
System Diagram NJEL0536S0201
GI

MA

EM

LC
SEL826Y
EC
Input/Output Signal Chart NJEL0536S0202
T: Transmit R: Receive
FE
Smart entrance control
Signals ECM Combination meter
unit

Engine speed signal T R

CL
Rear window defogger signal R T
MT
Heater fan switch signal R T

Air conditioner switch signal R T

AT
MI signal T R

Engine coolant temperature signal T R

AX
Fuel consumption signal T R

Vehicle speed signal R T

SU
Seat belt reminder signal R T

Headlamp switch signal T R

BR
Flashing indicator signal T R

Engine cooling fan speed signal T R ST

Child lock indicator signal T R

Door switches state signal T R RS

A/C compressor signal T R
BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-511
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NJEL0537

SEL804Y

System Description NJEL0538

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electonic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir-
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

EL-512
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Wiring Diagram — CAN —

Wiring Diagram — CAN — NJEL0539

LHD MODELS NJEL0539S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL782D

EL-513
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Wiring Diagram — CAN — (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0539S02

YEL783D

EL-514
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0540

WORK FLOW
1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” for “ENGINE”, “A/T” and “SMART
NJEL0540S01
GI
ENTRANCE” displayed on CONSULT-II. Refer to the following.
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (EC-116) for “ENGINE” MA
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITHOUT EURO-OBD) (EC-492) for “ENGINE”
I “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (AT-192) for “A/T”
I “CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (All) (AT-395) for “A/T” EM
I “CAN Communication Line Check” (EL-380) for “SMART ENTRANCE”
2. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” onto the check sheet. Refer LC
to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-516).
3. Based on the data monitor results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG” in the check sheet
table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET“ (EL-516). EC
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit.
4. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
FE
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-517).
CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-515
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET NJEL0540S02

SEL805Y

EL-516
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NJEL0540S03

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

SEL806Y

EL-517
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

SEL807Y

INSPECTION NJEL0540S04
Proceed trouble diagnosis according to the check sheet results (example).
Case 1: Replace ECM.
Case 2: Replace TCM.
Case 3: Replace smart entrance control unit.
Case 4: Check harness between TCM and smart entrance control unit. Refer to “CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN
TCM AND SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT” (EL-519).
Case 5: Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-522).
Case 6: Check TCM circuit. Refer to “TCM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-523).
Case 7: Check smart entrance control unit circuit. Refer to “SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
CHECK” (EL-524).
Case 8: Check combination meter circuit. Refer to “COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-525).
Case 9: Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-525).

EL-518
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN TCM AND SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT NJEL0540S05

1 CHECK CONNECTOR GI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector-side and harness-side). MA
LHD models
I Harness connector F115
I Harness connector M202 EM
RHD models
I Harness connector F43
I Harness connector E225 LC
I Harness connector E174
I Harness connector M159
OK or NG EC
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector. FE

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT CL

1. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F115 (LHD models) or harness connector F43 (RHD models).
2. Check the following.
I Continuity between TCM harness connector F109 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and harness connector F115 terminals 13 (L), MT
14 (R) (LHD models)

AT

AX

SU

BR
SEL865Y
I Continuity between TCM harness connector F109 terminals 5 (L), 6 (R) and harness connector F43 terminals 3 (L), 7
(R) (RHD models) ST

RS

BT

HA

SEL808Y SC
OK or NG
OK © I GO TO 4. (LHD models)
I GO TO 3. (RHD models)
NG © Repair harness.
IDX

EL-519
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect harness connector E174.
2. Check continuity between harness connector E225 terminals 3 (L), 7 (R) and harness connector E174 terminals 3 (L),
7 (R).

SEL809Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair harness.

EL-520
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector. GI
2. Check the following.
I Continuity between harness connector M202 terminals 13 (L), 14 (R) and smart entrance control unit connector M193
terminals 8 (L), 11 (R) (LHD models) MA

EM

LC

EC

SEL866Y
FE
I Continuity between harness connector M159 terminals 3 (L), 7 (R) and smart entrance control unit connector M193 ter-
minals 8 (L), 11 (R) (RHD models)
CL

MT

AT

AX
SEL810Y

OK or NG SU
OK © Reconnect all connectors to perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” for
“ENGINE”, “A/T” and “SMART ENTRANCE” displayed on CONSULT-II. Refer to the fol-
lowing.
BR
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (EC-116) for
“ENGINE”
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITHOUT EURO-OBD) (EC-
ST
492) for “ENGINE”
I “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (AT-192) for “A/T”
I “CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (All) (AT-395) for “A/T” RS
I “CAN Communication Line Check” (EL-380) for “SMART ENTRANCE”
NG © Repair harness. BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-521
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0540S06

1 CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check the terminals and connector of ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harness-
side).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F114 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).

SEL812Y

OK or NG
OK © Replace ECM.
NG © Repair harness between ECM and TCM.

EL-522
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
TCM CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0540S07

1 CHECK CONNECTOR GI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check the terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harness- MA
side).
OK or NG
EM
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.
LC
2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect TCM connector.
EC
2. Check resistance between TCM harness connector F109 terminals 5 (L) and 6 (R).
FE

CL

MT

AT
SEL813Y

OK or NG AX
OK © Replace TCM.
NG © Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F115 (LHD models). SU
Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F43 (RHD models).

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-523
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0540S08

1 CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check the terminals and connector of smart entrance control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit-
side and harness-side).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Check resistance between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminals 8 (L) and 11 (R).

SEL814Y

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Repair harness between smart entrance control unit and data link connector.

EL-524
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0540S09

1 CHECK CONNECTOR GI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check following terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side and MA
harness-side).
OK or NG
EM
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.
LC
2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
EC
2. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M171 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (R).
FE

CL

MT

AT
SEL815Y

OK or NG AX
OK © Replace combination meter.
NG © Repair harness between combination meter and smart entrance control unit. SU
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0540S10

1 CHECK CONNECTOR
BR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. ST
3. Check following terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side,
control unit-side, control module-side and harness-side).
I Combination meter RS
I Smart entrance control unit
I TCM
I ECM BT
I Between ECM and data link connector
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
HA
NG © Repair terminal or connector.
SC

IDX

EL-525
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector, smart entrance control unit connector and harness connector M202 (LHD
models) or harness connector M159 (RHD models).
2. Check continuity between data link connector M29 terminals 6 (L) and 3 (R).

SEL816Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © I Repair harness between data link connector and harness connector M202 (LHD mod-
els) or M159 (RHD models).
I Repair harness between data link connector and smart entrance control unit.
I Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.

3 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between data link connector M29 terminals 6 (L), 3 (R) and ground.

SEL817Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. (LHD models)
GO TO 4. (RHD models)
NG © I Repair harness between data link connector and harness connector M202 (LHD mod-
els) or M159 (RHD models).
I Repair harness between data link connector and smart entrance control unit.
I Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.

EL-526
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect harness connector E225. GI
2. Check continuity between harness connector E225 terminals 3 (L) and 7 (R).

MA

EM

LC

EC
SEL818Y

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair harness between harness connector E225 and harness connector E174.
CL
5 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between harness connector E225 terminals 3 (L) , 7 (R) and ground. MT

AT

AX

SU

SEL819Y BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. ST
NG © Repair harness between harness connector E225 and harness connector E174.
RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-527
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

6 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector and TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F114 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).

SEL820Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F115 (LHD models) or F43 (RHD
models).
Repair harness between ECM and TCM.

7 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between ECM harness connector F114 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and ground.

SEL821Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F115 (LHD models) or F43 (RHD
models).
Repair harness between ECM and TCM.

8 ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-529).
OK or NG
OK © Reconnect all connectors to perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” for
“ENGINE”, “A/T” and “SMART ENTRANCE” displayed on CONSULT-II. Refer to the fol-
lowing.
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (EC-116) for
“ENGINE”
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITHOUT EURO-OBD) (EC-
492) for “ENGINE”
I “DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (AT-192) for “A/T”
I “CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (All) (AT-395) for “A/T”
I “CAN Communication Line Check” (EL-380) for “SMART ENTRANCE”
NG © Replace ECM and/or combination meter.

EL-528
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NJEL0541

ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
INSPECTION GI
NJEL0541S01
I Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.
I Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86. MA
I Check resistance between combination meter terminals 26
and 27.
EM
Unit Terminal Resistance value (Ω)

ECM 94 - 86
SEL723Y Approx. 108 - 132 LC
Combination meter 26 - 27

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-529
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NJEL0542

SEL822Y

System Description NJEL0543

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many
electonic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with
2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wir-
ing. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.

EL-530
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Wiring Diagram — CAN —

Wiring Diagram — CAN — NJEL0544

LHD MODELS NJEL0544S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL784D

EL-531
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Wiring Diagram — CAN — (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0544S02

YEL785D

EL-532
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NJEL0545

WORK FLOW
1. Print all the data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” for “ENGINE” and “SMART
NJEL0545S01
GI
ENTRANCE” displayed on CONSULT-II. Refer to the following.
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (EC-116) for “ENGINE” MA
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITHOUT EURO-OBD) (EC-492) for “ENGINE”
I “CAN Communication Line Check” (EL-380) for “SMART ENTRANCE”.
2. Attach the printed sheet of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” onto the check sheet. Refer EM
to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-534).
3. Based on the data monitor results, put “v” marks onto the items with “UNKWN” or “NG” in the check sheet LC
table. Refer to “CHECK SHEET” (EL-534).
NOTE:
If “NG” is displayed on “CAN COMM” for the diagnosed control unit, replace the control unit. EC
4. According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to “CHECK SHEET RESULTS
(EXAMPLE)” (EL-535).
FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-533
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET NJEL0545S02

SEL823Y

EL-534
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) NJEL0545S03

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT
SEL824Y
HA
INSPECTION NJEL0545S04
Proceed trouble diagnosis according to the check sheet results (example). SC
Case 1: Replace ECM.
Case 2: Replace smart entrance control unit.
Case 3: Check ECM circuit. Refer to “ECM CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-536).
Case 4: Check smart entrance control unit circuit. Refer to “SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
CHECK” (EL-537).
Case 5: Check combination meter circuit. Refer to “COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-538). IDX
Case 6: Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to “CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK” (EL-539).

EL-535
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ECM CIRCUIT CHECK NJEL0545S05

1 CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (control module-side and harness-
side).
LHD models
I ECM
I Harness connector F115
I Harness connector M202
RHD models
I ECM
I Harness connector F43
I Harness connector E225
I Harness connector E174
I Harness connector M159
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check resistance between ECM harness connector F114 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R).

SEL812Y

OK or NG
OK © Replace ECM.
NG © Repair harness between ECM and smart entrance control unit.

EL-536
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0545S06

1 CHECK CONNECTOR GI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check terminals and connector of smart entrance control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit-side MA
and harness-side).
OK or NG
EM
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.
LC
2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
EC
2. Check resistance between smart entrance control unit harness connector M193 terminals 8 (L) and 11 (R).
FE

CL

MT

AT
SEL814Y

OK or NG AX
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Repair harness between smart entrance control unit and data link connector. SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-537
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0545S07

1 CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side and harness-
side).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector.

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector.
2. Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M171 terminals 26 (L) and 27 (R).

SEL815Y

OK or NG
OK © Replace combination meter.
NG © Repair harness between combination meter and smart entrance control unit.

EL-538
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT CHECK =NJEL0545S08

1 CHECK CONNECTOR GI
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Check following terminals and connector for damage, bend and loose connection (meter-side, control unit-side, control MA
module-side and harness-side).
I Combination meter
I Smart entrance control unit EM
I ECM
I Between ECM and smart entrance control unit
OK or NG LC
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair terminal or connector. EC

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT FE

1. Disconnect combination meter connector, smart entrance control unit connector and harness connector M202 (LHD
models) or harness connector M159 (RHD models).
2. Check continuity between data link connector M29 terminals 6 (L) and 3 (R). CL

MT

AT

AX

SEL816Y SU
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. BR
NG © I Repair harness between data link connector and harness connector M202 (LHD mod-
els) or M159 (RHD models).
I Repair harness between data link connector and smart entrance control unit.
ST
I Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.
RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-539
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between data link connector M29 terminals 6 (L), 3 (R) and ground.

SEL817Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. (LHD models)
GO TO 4. (RHD models)
NG © I Repair harness between data link connector and harness connector M202 (LHD mod-
els) or M159 (RHD models).
I Repair harness between data link connector and smart entrance control unit.
I Repair harness between data link connector and combination meter.

4 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect harness connector E225.
2. Check continuity between harness connector E225 terminals 3 (L) and 7 (R).

SEL818Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair harness between harness connector E225 and harness connector E174.

EL-540
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

5 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between harness connector E225 terminals 3 (L) , 7 (R) and ground. GI

MA

EM

LC

SEL819Y EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. FE
NG © Repair harness between harness connector E225 and harness connector E174.

CL
6 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check continuity between ECM harness connector F114 terminals 94 (L) and 86 (R). MT

AT

AX

SU

SEL820Y BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7. ST
NG © Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F115 (LHD models) or F43 (RHD
models).
RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-541
 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

7 CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

Check continuity between ECM harness connector F114 terminals 94 (L), 86 (R) and ground.

SEL821Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Repair harness between ECM and harness connector F115 (LHD models) or F43 (RHD
models).

8 ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Check components inspection. Refer to “ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION” (EL-542).
OK or NG
OK © Reconnect all connectors to perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” and “DATA MONITOR” for
“ENGINE” and “SMART ENTRANCE” displayed on CONSULT-II. Refer to the following.
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITH EURO-OBD) (EC-116) for
“ENGINE”
I “DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE” (WITHOUT EURO-OBD) (EC-
492) for “ENGINE”
I “CAN Communication Line Check” (EL-380) for “SMART ENTRANCE”
NG © Replace ECM and/or combination meter.

Component Inspection NJEL0546

ECM/COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
INSPECTION NJEL0546S01
I Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.
I Check resistance between ECM terminals 94 and 86.
I Check resistance between combination meter terminals 26
and 27.
Unit Terminal Resistance value (Ω)

ECM 94 - 86
SEL723Y Approx. 108 - 132
Combination meter 26 - 27

EL-542
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment

Engine Compartment NJEL0129

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL609D

EL-543
 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment (Cont’d)

YEL610D

EL-544
 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment (Cont’d)
NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-545
 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment/LHD Models

Passenger Compartment/LHD Models NJEL0130

YEL611D

EL-546
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment/LHD Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL612D

EL-547
 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment/RHD Models

Passenger Compartment/RHD Models NJEL0345

YEL613D

EL-548
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment/RHD Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL614D

EL-549
 HARNESS LAYOUT
How to Read Harness Layout

How to Read Harness Layout NJEL0131

SEL252V

The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
I Main Harness
I Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment)
I Engine Control Harness
I Body Harness
TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE NJEL0131S01
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL NJEL0131S02
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
Water proof type Standard type
Connector type
Male Female Male Female

I Cavity: Less than 4

I Relay connector

I Cavity: From 5 to 8

I Cavity: More than 9

I Ground terminal etc.

—

EL-550
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Sedan

Outline/Sedan NJEL0132
LHD MODELS NJEL0132S03
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX
YEL727C
SU
NOTE:
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution”, “GROUND”, EL-24.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-551
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Sedan (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0132S04

YEL728C

NOTE:
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution”, “GROUND”, EL-24.

EL-552
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Hatchback

Outline/Hatchback NJEL0491
LHD MODELS NJEL0491S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX
MEL177M
SU
NOTE:
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution”, “GROUND”, EL-24.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-553
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Hatchback (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0491S02

MEL178M

NOTE:
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution”, “GROUND”, EL-24.

EL-554
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline/Hatchback (Cont’d)
NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-555
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness

Main Harness NJEL0347

LHD MODELS NJEL0347S01

YEL615D

EL-556
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL616D

EL-557
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0347S02

YEL617D

EL-558
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL618D

EL-559
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness

Engine Room Harness NJEL0342

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — LHD MODELS NJEL0342S01

YEL619D

EL-560
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL620D

EL-561
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — RHD MODELS NJEL0342S03

YEL623D

EL-562
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL624D

EL-563
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT — LHD MODELS NJEL0342S04

YEL625D

EL-564
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT — RHD MODELS NJEL0342S05

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL626D

EL-565
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models

Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models NJEL0135

LHD MODELS NJEL0135S01

YEL627D

EL-566
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL628D

EL-567
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0135S02

YEL629D

EL-568
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/QG Engine Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL630D

EL-569
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models

Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models NJEL0343

LHD MODELS (WITH COMMON RAIL) NJEL0343S01

YEL631D

EL-570
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL632D

EL-571
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS (WITH COMMON RAIL) NJEL0343S02

YEL633D

EL-572
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL634D

EL-573
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)
LHD MODELS (WITHOUT COMMON RAIL) NJEL0343S03

YEL635D

EL-574
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL636D

EL-575
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS (WITHOUT COMMON RAIL) NJEL0343S04

YEL637D

EL-576
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness/YD Engine Models (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL638D

EL-577
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan

Body Harness/Sedan NJEL0136

INTERIOR ROOM SIDE — LHD MODELS NJEL0136S01

YEL641D

EL-578
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL642D

EL-579
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
TRUNK ROOM SIDE — LHD MODELS NJEL0136S03

YEL751C

EL-580
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-581
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
INTERIOR ROOM SIDE — RHD MODELS NJEL0136S04

YEL643D

EL-582
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL644D

EL-583
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
TRUNK ROOM SIDE — RHD MODELS NJEL0136S06

YEL754C

EL-584
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Sedan (Cont’d)
NOTE:

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-585
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Hatchback

Body Harness/Hatchback NJEL0348

LHD MODELS NJEL0348S01

YEL645D

EL-586
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Hatchback (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL646D

EL-587
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Hatchback (Cont’d)
RHD MODELS NJEL0348S02

YEL647D

EL-588
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness/Hatchback (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX
YEL648D

EL-589
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Room Lamp Harness

Room Lamp Harness NJEL0140

YEL649D

EL-590
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/LHD Models

Front Door Harness/LHD Models NJEL0142

LH SIDE NJEL0142S07
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX
YEL650D
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-591
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/LHD Models (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NJEL0142S06

YEL651D

EL-592
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/RHD Models

Front Door Harness/RHD Models NJEL0349

LH SIDE NJEL0349S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX
YEL652D
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-593
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness/RHD Models (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NJEL0349S03

YEL653D

EL-594
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness

Rear Door Harness NJEL0416

LH SIDE NJEL0416S01
GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX
YEL654D
SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

EL-595
 HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness (Cont’d)
RH SIDE NJEL0416S02

YEL655D

EL-596
HARNESS LAYOUT
Back Door Harness

Back Door Harness NJEL0492

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

IDX

YEL656D

EL-597
 NJEL0144

BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp

Headlamp NJEL0144S03

Item Wattage (W)

2-bulbs type 60/55 (H4)

High/Low (Semi-sealed beam)
4-bulbs type 55 (H1)/55 (*1)

*1 H1LL ... RHD models except for Europe, H7 ... RHD models for Europe and LHD models

Exterior Lamp NJEL0144S01

Item Wattage (W)

Front fog lamp 55 (H3)

Front turn signal lamp 21

Side turn signal lamp 5

Parking lamp 5

Front side marker lamp 3.8

Turn signal 21

Stop/Tail 21/5
Rear combination lamp
Back-up 18

Rear fog lamp 21

Rear side marker lamp 3.8

License lamp 5

On the rear parcel shelf 18

High-mounted stop lamp
In the air spoiler (LED) 3.2

Interior Lamp NJEL0144S02

Item Wattage (W)

Interior room lamp 10

With roof console 3

Map lamp
Without roof console 8

Vanity mirror lamp 8

Personal lamp 5

Trunk room lamp 3.4

EL-598
 NJEL0311

WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)

Use the chart below to find out what each wiring

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical F/FOG EL Front Fog Lamp GI
index to find the location (page number) of each
wiring diagram. F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name

FRO2 EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor (Non MA
E-OBD)
ISTSIG AT A/T 1ST Signal
FRO2/H EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
(Non E-OBD)
EM
2NDSIG AT A/T 2ND Signal

3RDSIG AT A/T 3RD Signal FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor

LC
4THSIG AT A/T 4TH Signal FUEL EC Fuel Injection System Function

A/C, M HA Manual Air Conditioner GLOW EC Glow Control System

EC
A/CCUT EC Air Conditioner Cut Control H/AIM EL Headlamp Aiming Control System

AAC/V EC IACV-AAC Valve H/LAMP EL Headlamp

FE
AACVLV EC IACV-AAC Valve H/SEAT EL Heated Seat

ABS BR Anti-lock Brake System HEATER HA Heater System

CL
APS EC Accelerator Position Sensor HLC EL Headlamp Washer

AT/C EC A/T Control HORN EL Horn MT

ATCONT EC A/T Control IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor

ATDIAG EC A/T Diagnosis Communication Line IATSEN EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor AT
AUDIO EL Audio IGN/SG EC Ignition Signal

BA/FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and ILL EL Illumination AX

TCM Power Supply
INJECT EC Injector
BACK/L EL Back-up Lamp
INJPMP EC Injection Pump SU
BRK/SW EC Brake Pedal Position Switch
INT/L EL Spot, Vanity Mirror, Personal and
CHARGE SC Charging System Trunk Room Lamps BR
CHIME EL Warning Chime IVC EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid
Valve
CIGAR EL Cigarette Lighter ST
IVC/V EC Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid
CKPS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) Valve
CKPS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) KS EC Knock Sensor RS
CLOCK EL Clock LOAD EC Load Signal
COOL/F EC Cooling Fan Control LPSV AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve BT
D/LOCK EL Power Door Lock MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor
DEF EL Rear Window Defogger MAIN AT Main Power Supply and Ground Cir-
HA
cuit
DTRL EL Headlamp — With Daytime Light
System MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground Cir- SC
cuit
ECMRLY EC ECM Relay
METER EL Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp.
ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
and Fuel Gauges
EGR/TS EC EGR Temperature Sensor
MIL/DL EC MIL and Data Link Connectors
EGRC1 EC EGR Function IDX
MIRROR EL Door Mirror
EGVC/V EC EGR Volume Control Valve
MULTI EL Multi-remote Control System
ENGSS AT Engine Speed Signal
NATS EL Nissan Anti-Theft System

EL-599
 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name Code Section Wiring Diagram Name

NAVI EL Navigation System TPS EC Throttle Position Sensor

NONDTC AT Non-detectable Items TURN EL Turn Signal and Hazard Warning

Lamps
O2H1B1 EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
(E-OBD) VSS EC Vehicle Speed Sensor

O2H2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater VSSA/T AT Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolu-
(E-OBD) tion Sensor)

O2S1B1 EC Front Heated Oxygen Sensor VSSMTR AT Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR
(E-OBD)
WARN EL Warning Lamps
O2S2B1 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor
(E-OBD) WINDOW EL Power Window

OVRCSV AT Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve WIP/R EL Rear Wiper and Washer

PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Con- WIPER EL Front Wiper and Washer
trol Solenoid Valve

PHASE EC Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)

PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch

PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch

PNPSW1 EC Park/Neutral Position Switch

POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)

POWER EL Power Supply Routing

PRGVLV EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume Con-

trol Solenoid Valve

PST/SW EC Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch

R/FOG EL Rear Fog Lamp

ROOM/L EL Interior Room Lamp

RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure Sensor

RRO2 EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor (Non

E-OBD)

RRO2/H EC Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater

(Non E-OBD)

S/SIG EC Start Signal

SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System

S/LOCK EL Power Door Lock — Super Lock —

SROOF EL Sunroof

SRS RS Supplemental Restraint System

SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A

SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B

START SC Starting System

STOP/L EL Stop Lamp

TAIL/L EL Parking, License and Tail Lamps

TCV AT Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid

Valve

TPS AT Throttle Position Sensor

EL-600